JP6986280B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention comprises a control means capable of executing a variable display game in which identification information is variablely displayed based on the establishment of a start condition, and is advantageous to the player when the stop result of the variable display game is a special result. Regarding a gaming machine capable of generating a gaming state.

Conventionally, the first variable display game is executed based on the winning of the first starting port (establishment of the first starting condition), and the first is based on the winning of the second starting opening (establishment of the second starting condition). (2) There is a gaming machine capable of executing a variable display game and setting both the first variable display game and the second variable display game in a running state (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2006-51337

However, the game was monotonous, and there was room for improvement in the interest of the game.

An object of the present invention is to improve the interest of a game in a gaming machine.

In a typical embodiment of the present invention, a control means capable of executing a variable display game in which identification information is variablely displayed based on the establishment of a start condition is provided, and when the stop result of the variable display game is a special result, In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, the control means executes the first variable display game based on the establishment of the first starting condition, and is based on the establishment of the second starting condition. It is possible to execute the second variable display game so that both the first variable display game and the second variable display game are being executed, and the first variable display game can be set according to the gaming state. And the variable display game of one of the second variable display games is configured to be defined as the main variable display game, and the first signal corresponding to the stop of the main variable display game is sent to the outside of the game machine. In addition to the first signal, a second signal corresponding to the stop of the variable display game can be output regardless of whether the variable display game is the main game or the non-main variable display game. It can be output to the outside of the game machine .

According to one embodiment of the present invention, the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a perspective view which looked at the gaming machine from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the production control system of a gaming machine. It is a figure explaining the transition state at the time of power-on of a gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the main process of a game control. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the main process of a game control. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a probability setting change / confirmation process. It is a figure which shows the display example of the performance display device. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure start port switch common processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure hold information determination processing (first half). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure hold information determination process (the latter half). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the look-ahead jackpot determination process. Special Figure 1 It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 game processing (the first half). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 game processing (the latter half). Special Figure 1 It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of ordinary processing. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of ordinary processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 variation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 variation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fall lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit determination process. It is a table exemplifying the big hit probability, the small hit probability, and the fall probability. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a table exemplifying the distribution of the type of jackpot. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 variation pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fluctuation start information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the time shortening fluctuation number update process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a procedure of processing during fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 change process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the special figure 1 display process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the special figure 2 display process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the special figure 2 display process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fanfare / interval processing (first half). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fanfare / interval processing (the latter half). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 1. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit end setting process 2. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit end setting process 3. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the small hit fanfare middle processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the received command check process. It is a flowchart which shows the received command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the one-shot system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead variable system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the design system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variable system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variation effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a hit system command processing. It is a time chart of the setting suggestion effect which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a table which shows an example of the reliability of the setting suggestion effect which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is an example of a table showing the relationship between the setting suggestion effect and the big hit according to the first embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram of the setting suggestion effect which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a time chart of the 1st modification of the setting suggestion effect which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram (first half) of the 1st modification of the setting suggestion effect which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram (second half) of the 1st modification of the setting suggestion effect which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a time chart of the 2nd modification of the setting suggestion effect which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram (first half) of the 2nd modification of the setting suggestion effect which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram (second half) of the 2nd modification of the setting suggestion effect which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of another setting suggestion effect which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram explaining another example of the other setting suggestion effect which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a table which shows the correspondence relationship between the work setting value of the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment, the display probability setting value (setting example 1, 2, 3, 4), and the effect control information. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the probability setting change / confirmation process of the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 3 or the setting example 4 of the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the 1st modification of the display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the 2nd modification of the display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the 3rd modification of the display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the 4th modification of the display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the 5th modification of the display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the probability setting change / confirmation process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the one-shot system command processing which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the hole / player setting mode processing which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in the setting change state which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is another example of the front view of the game board in the setting change state which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of the signal output and the like in the special gaming state of a normal operation which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of the signal output and the like when the power failure occurs in the special gaming state which concerns on 4th Embodiment, and it recovers normally by the power recovery. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of the signal output and the like when the power failure occurs in the special gaming state which concerns on 4th Embodiment, and the memory abnormality occurs in the power recovery. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of the signal output and the like when the power failure occurs in the special gaming state which concerns on 4th Embodiment, and it recovers normally by the power restoration and shifts to the setting confirmation state. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of the signal output and the like when the power failure occurs in the special gaming state which concerns on 4th Embodiment, and it recovers normally by the power restoration and shifts to the setting change state. A timing chart showing an example of timing such as signal output when a power failure occurs during the special gaming state according to the fourth embodiment, the power is restored to normal, the setting is changed, and then the power is turned off. Is. It is a front view of the game board which concerns on 5th Embodiment (the 1). It is a front view of the game board which concerns on 5th Embodiment (the 2). It is a front view of the game board which concerns on 5th Embodiment (the 3). It is a game state transition diagram which illustrates the transition of the game state in 5th Embodiment. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a procedure of processing during change in FIG. 1 according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a procedure of processing during change in FIG. 2 according to the fifth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the external information editing process which concerns on 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the external information editing process which concerns on 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the symbol fixed number 1 signal editing processing which concerns on 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the symbol fixed number 2 signal editing processing which concerns on 5th Embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, it is a table summarizing the generation mode (living state) of the symbol fixed number signal in each gaming state. (A) shows the generation mode of the symbol confirmation number 1 signal, and (b) shows the generation mode of the symbol confirmation number 2 signal. In the fifth embodiment, it is a time chart which shows the generation mode (living state) of the symbol fixed number signal in each game state. (A) shows the generation mode of the symbol confirmation number 1 signal, and (b-1) and (b-2) show the generation mode of the symbol confirmation number 2 signal. In the fifth embodiment, it is an example of a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the description of the gaming machine, the front, back, left, and right refer to the direction seen from the player during the game.

[Overall view of the gaming machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine.

The gaming machine 10 includes an opening / closing frame that is rotatably attached to the frame 11 fixed to the island equipment via a hinge. The opening / closing frame is composed of a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15.

A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game viewing area that makes the game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 visible.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, by opening only the glass frame 15, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed. Further, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 3) arranged on the back surface side of the game board 30 can be accessed. Can be done.

Various frame constituent members are arranged on the edge portion around the cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15.

Decorative devices 18a and 18b capable of producing light emission according to the gaming state are arranged in the upper center and the left side of the glass frame 15. The decorative devices 18a and 18b accommodate lighting members such as LEDs inside, and perform a light emitting effect according to the game state. The lighting members arranged inside the decorative devices 18a and 18b form a part of the frame decorative device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An upper speaker 19a is arranged in the upper right corner portion and the upper left corner portion of the glass frame 15, respectively. Apart from these upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided at the lower part of the gaming machine 10. The lower speaker 19b is arranged in the lower left corner portion of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner portion of the front frame 12. The upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, and the like.

On the right side of the glass frame 15, a projecting effect unit 13 that extends in the vertical direction of the gaming machine 10 and projects forward (on the player side) is disposed. The protrusion effect unit 13 is an effect device that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the progress state of the game. The lighting member arranged inside the protrusion effect unit 13 also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

At the bottom of the glass frame 15, an upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are supplied to the ball launcher (not shown) one by one.

The upper plate unit further includes an effect operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, a ball lending operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 22 that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the game state. ..

The effect operation device is an operation device in which the touch panel 25b is incorporated in the effect button 25, and is provided in the center of the upper part of the upper plate unit so that the player can easily operate it.

By operating the effect operation device by the player, it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the special figure variation display game or the like displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode) or execute a notice effect that announces the result of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory in advance. It should be noted that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when simply referred to as a variable display game, this specification refers to a special figure variable display game.

Further, the effect pattern may be changed by the player operating the effect operation device not only during the execution of the variable display game but also during the non-execution.

The game state when the variable display game is executed is composed of a plurality of game states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. Further, the special gaming state is, for example, a time saving state as a specific gaming state, a state in which the probability of occurrence of a special result (for example, a big hit) is high (probability variation state, probability fluctuation state), or a big hit state (special gaming state) in a variable display game. ), Small hit game state (small hit state).

Here, the probability change state (specific game state) continues until the next big hit occurs (loop type), continues until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed (number cut type, ST), and There are things that continue until a predetermined probability fall lottery is won (fall lottery type).

Further, it may be possible to always generate a probabilistic state when a big hit occurs without determining whether or not to generate a probable change state by a big hit symbol random number, or to provide a winning device or the like provided with a specific area to specify. A probabilistic state may be generated when the game ball passes through the area.

The ball lending operation device is an operation device operated when the player rents a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper plate unit. The ball lending operation device includes a ball lending button 27, a return button 28, and a balance display unit 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by the player when renting a gaming ball, and the return button 28 is a button for ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. This is a button operated by the player. The balance display unit 26 is a display area for displaying the balance of a prepaid card or the like.

The decoration device 22 houses a lighting member such as an LED inside, and is a device that performs light emission effect or the like according to a game state, and is provided on the front side portion of the upper plate unit. The lighting member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

Below the glass frame 15 provided with the above-mentioned upper plate unit and the like, and below the front frame 12, an operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of the ball launcher (not shown) and a game ball can be stored. A lower plate 23 is provided.

The operation handle 24 is located at the lower right of the front frame 12 and below the lower speaker 19b on the right side. When the player rotates the operation handle 24, the ball launcher launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 into the game area 32 of the game board 30. The rate of fire of the game ball launched from the ball launcher is set so as to increase as the amount of rotation of the operation handle 24 increases. That is, the ball launching device can change the launching force, which is the force (speed) for launching the game ball into the game area, in response to the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and the game can be played in various launch modes with different launching forces. You can fire a ball. The launch mode includes a left-handed hit (normal hit) in which the game ball is made to flow down on the left side of the game area 32, and a right-handed hit in which the game ball is made to flow down on the right side of the game area 32.

The lower plate 23 is arranged below the upper plate unit at a predetermined distance from the upper plate unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball extraction hole 23a that penetrates the bottom surface of the lower plate 23 in the vertical direction, and an opening / closing operation unit 23b for opening and closing the ball extraction hole 23a. When the player operates the opening / closing operation unit 23b to open the ball punching hole 23a, the game ball stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball pulling hole 23a.

[Game board]
Subsequently, the game board 30 of the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 30 provided in the gaming machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-shaped game board main body 30a as a mounting base for various members. The game board main body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on the front surface of the game board main body 30a. The gaming machine 10 is configured to launch a gaming ball from a ball launching device into a gaming area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 to play a game. A windmill, an obstacle nail, or the like is disposed in the game area 32 as a member for changing the flow direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case (front component) 40 that forms a window portion that serves as a display area for a variable display game is attached to substantially the center of the game area 32. Behind the window portion formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) for variable display (variable display) of a plurality of identification information is arranged. The display device 41 is provided with, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that the display content can be visually recognized from the front side of the game board 30 via the window portion of the center case 40. The display device 41 is not limited to the one provided with a liquid crystal display, and may be provided with a display such as an EL or a CRT.

A plurality of variable display areas are provided on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, and identification information (special symbol) and a character that directs a variable display game are displayed in each variable display area. In addition, an image based on the progress of the game (big hit display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

Further, the center case 40 has an inlet 40a to the warp passage 40e for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage on which the game ball passing through the warp passage 40e can roll. A portion 40b is provided. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball rolled on the stage portion 40b is placed in the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37. It is easier to win a prize.

An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided on the upper portion and the right side portion of the center case 40, respectively. The upper effect unit 40c and the side effect unit 40d form a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 4).

A normal symbol start gate (normal symbol start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40. Inside the normal drawing start gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 is provided. When the game ball driven into the game area 32 passes through the normal map start gate 34, the normal map variation display game is executed.

A general winning opening 35 is arranged in the game area 32 on the lower left of the center case 40, and a general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the game area 32 on the lower right of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switches (SW) 35a to 35n (see FIG. 3) provided in the general winning opening 35.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, a start winning opening (starting opening 1, first starting winning area) 36 that gives a start condition for a special figure variation display game is provided. In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal variable winning device 37 (ordinary electric accessory,) provided with a second starting winning opening (starting opening 2, second starting winning area) below the starting gate 34 in the normal drawing. (Fuden) is provided. The normal variable winning device 37 includes a movable member (movable piece) 37b that slides so as to retract from the front to the back side to convert the game ball into a state in which it can easily flow in. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball cannot win the normal variable winning device 37. When the game ball wins the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, the special figure variable display game is executed as an auxiliary game. It should be noted that the starting winning opening 36 is likely to win a game ball when hitting left, and the normal variable winning device 37 is easy to win a game ball when hitting right.

The movable member 37b is a slide-opening / closing type ordinary electric accessory, and operates via the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode. When opened, the game ball changes to an open state (a state in which the game is easy to win, which is advantageous for the player), in which the game ball easily flows into the normally variable winning device 37.

The movable member 37b is controlled by the game control device 100, which will be described later. The game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of a winning easy state by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game and setting the winning probability of the normal map fluctuation display game to a higher probability than usual, or a normal game state. By making the time for which the easy-to-win state occurs longer than the easy-to-win state that occurs in the above-mentioned specific game state, a time-saving state (general electric support state) is generated. In addition, even in the probable change state (excluding the latent probable change state), the time saving state (the normal electric support state) occurs in duplicate.

In the game area 32 on the right side of the starting winning opening 36, the lower winning opening is opened by retracting from the front to the back by the lower large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 7). A first special variable winning device 38 (special electric accessory) having an opening / closing door 38c is provided. The first special variable winning device 38 converts the large winning opening from the closed state (closed state unfavorable to the player) to the open state (gaming state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variation display game. By facilitating the inflow of game balls into the large winning opening, a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. In the lower prize opening, a lower prize opening switch 38a (count switch) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening. It should be noted that the first special variable winning device 38 is likely to win a game ball when hitting to the right.

The game area 32 above the normal variable winning device 37 has an opening / closing door 39c that opens the upper winning opening by rotating the upper end side in the direction of tilting to the right by the upper winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3). A second special variable winning device 39 is provided. The second special variable winning device 39 converts the large winning opening from the closed state (closed state unfavorable to the player) to the open state (special gaming state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variation display game. By facilitating the inflow of game balls into the large winning opening, a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. In the large winning opening, an upper large winning opening switch 39a (count switch) (see FIG. 3) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening. It should be noted that the second special variable winning device 39 is likely to win a game ball when hitting to the right. Further, the lower prize opening switch 38a and the upper prize opening switch 39a are collectively referred to as a large winning opening switch 43.

A specific area 86 (so-called V winning opening) is provided inside the second special variable winning device 39. When a game ball enters the specific area 86 (V winning opening), the probability change state (high probability state, specific game state) after the end of the big hit is determined. The specific area 86 may be opened for a long time only in the case of a probability variation jackpot so that the game ball can easily pass through. The game control device 100 can detect the passage of the game ball to the specific area 86 (V prize) via a sensor (specific area switch 72 described later) or the like, and when the V prize is detected, the game control device 100 shifts to a probable change state after the big hit ends. At the same time as confirming that the operation is to be performed, information (such as a command for passing through a specific area) indicating that the V prize has been won is transmitted to the effect control device 300 described later. Then, the effect control device 300 can notify the V prize on the display device 41 or the like.

When the game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, and the large winning opening of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) wins the winning opening. The number of prize balls corresponding to the type of the above is discharged from the payout device to the upper plate 21. Further, the lower game area 32 is provided with an out port 30b for collecting game balls that have not won a prize in the winning opening or the like. Further, in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, and the special variable winning devices 38, 39 and their vicinity, LEDs capable of emitting light when a game ball wins a prize (a board decoration device described later). A part of 46) is arranged.

Further, a special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 variation display game) and a normal map variation display game are executed in the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a outside the game area 32. A batch display device 50 is provided. The batch display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 that display information such as the current gaming state.

The batch display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (special figure 1 display, lamp D1) and a second special figure fluctuation for a fluctuation display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) and the like. The display unit 52 (special figure 2 display, lamp D2), the fluctuation display unit 53 for the normal figure fluctuation display game (normal figure display, lamps D8, D10, D18), and the start (hold) of each fluctuation display game. It has a storage display unit (special figure 1 hold display 54, special figure 2 hold display 55, normal figure hold display 56) for notifying the number of stored pieces. Special figure 1 The hold indicator 54 is composed of lamps D11 and D12. The special figure 2 hold indicator 55 is composed of lamps D13 and D14. The normal figure hold indicator 56 is composed of lamps D15 and D16.

Further, the batch display device 50 is informed that it is a right-handed hit (when it should be right-handed) or a left-handed time (normal hitting time), and the first game state display unit 57 (first game state display, lamp). D7), the second game state display unit 58 (second game state display, lamp D17) that lights up when a time reduction state occurs to notify the occurrence of the time reduction state, and the probability state of a big hit when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on is high. Third game status display unit 59 (third game status display, probability status display unit, lamp D9) that displays the status, the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (number of times of opening and closing of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39) A round display unit 60 (lamps D3-D6) for displaying the above is provided.

In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, the variable display game is executed by the variable display in which the identification information (for example, the central segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (blinking). The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are not limited to such a segment type display unit, and may be composed of an aggregate of a plurality of LEDs, and when a variable display is executed. All LEDs are turned on and off (all LEDs blink at the same time), circular lighting (turns on and off in a predetermined order at predetermined time intervals from any one LED), or multiple lights. It may be performed by turning on / off (blinking) or circulating lighting by a predetermined number of LEDs among the LEDs. Also in the normal figure display 53, the variable display game is executed by the variable display (blinking) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. Further, the normal figure display 53 can be appropriately configured in the same manner as the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52.

The lamp display device 80 includes lamp display units 1 and 2 (LEDs) that execute variable display (blinking) that repeats lighting display and extinguishing display as a symbol (fourth special symbol described later), and start of each special symbol variation display game. (Holding) It has a lamp display unit 3-6 (LED) for notifying the number of stored items. The lamp display device 80 is controlled by the effect control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display units 1 and 2 blink at a predetermined blinking cycle (for example, 200 msec (millisecond)) as a fluctuation display. While the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the normal figure display 53 of the batch display device 50 is measured by the game control device 100, the lamp of the lamp display device 80 The fluctuation time of the display units 1 and 2 is measured by the effect control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display units 3 and 4 (special figure 1 hold LED 1, special figure 1 hold LED 2) display the number of special figure 1 hold (first start storage number) depending on the combination of the off state, the on state, and the blinking state. Similarly, the lamp display units 5 and 6 (special figure 2 hold LED 1, special figure 2 hold LED 2) display the special figure 2 hold number (second start storage number) depending on the combination of the off state, the on state, and the blinking state. do. The lamp display unit 3-6 ends the display of the number of holds due to the occurrence of a big hit, but displays the number of holds except when the display device 41 is in the state of a big hit (including the case where the reach described later occurs in the display device 41). conduct.

Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10, the normal map variation display game, and the special map variation display game will be described in detail.

In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by launching a gaming ball from a ball launching device (not shown) toward the gaming area 32. The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails, windmills, etc. arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the normal drawing start gate 34, the general winning opening 35, and the starting winning opening. 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 38, 39 is won, or the ball flows into the out port 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. Then, when a game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 38, 39, the number of winning balls corresponding to the type of the winning winning opening is a payout device. It is discharged to the upper plate 21 through.

The normal figure start gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal figure start gate 34. When the game ball passes through the normal map start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the normal map variation display game is executed based on the determination result of the hit determination random number value extracted at this time.

When the normal map fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, when the normal map fluctuation display game has already been played and the normal map fluctuation display game has not ended, or when the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is a hit, it is normal. When the game ball passes through the normal drawing start gate 34 when the variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, the storage number is added (+1) if the normal drawing start storage number is less than the upper limit number.

The hit determination random value for determining the hit / miss of the normal map variation display game is stored in the normal map start memory, and when the hit judgment random value matches the judgment value, the normal map variation display is performed. The game is a hit and a specific result mode (specific result) is derived.

The normal map fluctuation display game is executed by the normal map display 53 provided in the batch display device 50. The normal identification information 53 is composed of LEDs that indicate a hit when the normal identification information (normal figure) is lit and a deviation when the normal identification information (normal figure) is off, and the normal identification information fluctuates by blinking and displaying this LED. The display is performed, and after a predetermined fluctuation display time has elapsed, the result is displayed by turning on or off the LED.

When the normal figure random value extracted when passing through the normal figure start gate 34 is a hit value, the normal symbol displayed on the normal figure display 53 stops in the hit state and becomes the hit state. At this time, by driving the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3), the movable member 37b is converted into an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds), and the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 is converted into an open state. Winning is allowed.

The winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected as the start winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit, and the game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is the special figure 2. It is detected as a winning ball for starting a variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit.

When the start winning ball of the special figure variation display game is detected, the jackpot random number value, the jackpot symbol random value, each variation pattern random value, and the like are extracted. These random numbers are stored in the special figure reservation storage area (a part of the RAM) of the game control device 100 as the special figure start winning memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, up to 8 times). The stored number of the special figure start prize memory is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display 54 and the special figure 2 hold display 55 for notifying the start prize number of the batch display device 50, and is also displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. Is displayed.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning to the start winning opening 36 or the first start memory. Further, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 variable display game on the special figure 2 display 52 based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 or the second start memory.

The special figure 1 variable display game (1st special figure variable display game) and the special figure 2 variable display game (2nd special figure variable display game) have identification information (identification information) on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. This is performed by displaying the special symbol (special symbol) in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying the predetermined result mode.

In the present embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called simultaneous variable machine, and the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be put into an execution state at the same time (both) independently of each other. If a big hit occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game (there is no small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game in this embodiment), the running special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a loss result. do. When a big hit occurs in the special figure 2 variable display game, the running special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a loss result.

If a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 variable display game, the running special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted. In this case, the measurement of the fluctuation time by the special figure 1 game processing timer is interrupted, the derivation of the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (display of the stop symbol corresponding to the stop symbol number) is postponed, and the special figure 2 fluctuation display is performed. After the small hit operation related to the game is completed, the interrupted special figure 1 variable display game can be restarted.

Further, when the game ball wins the normal variable winning device 37 by right-handed in the normal game state, the special figure 2 variable display game starts to fluctuate, but basically fluctuates for a long time (long fluctuation, for example, 10 minutes). During this period, if a big hit occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game, the game will be forcibly removed and stopped.

Further, the display device 41 executes a decorative special figure variation display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc.) are variablely displayed corresponding to each special figure variation display game.

In the decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-mentioned numbers and the like is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), and middle (third special symbol). ) Is started, and the fluctuating symbols are sequentially stopped after a predetermined time, and the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is displayed. Further, on the display device 41, various effects such as the appearance of characters are displayed in order to improve the interest. Further, in the decorative special symbol variation display game, as another decorative special symbol (identification information), the fourth special symbol is displayed by repeating (blinking) the lighting display and the extinguishing display on the lamp display units 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 80. fluctuate. The fluctuation display of the lamp display units 1 and 2 is stopped by "turning off" in the case of a miss and "lighting" in the case of a big hit or a small hit after a predetermined time from the start.

Regarding the decorative special figure variable display game in the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be executed on different display devices or different display areas, or the same display may be executed. It may be executed in the device or the display area. Further, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game may be in an execution state (executed state) at the same time.

When the game ball is won in the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random value at the time of winning detection is the big hit value), as a result of the special figure fluctuation display game. A specific result mode (special result mode) is derived from the displayed symbol, and a big hit state (special game state) is obtained. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as "7, 7, 7" are aligned).

At this time, the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 are changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) by energizing the large winning opening solenoids (38b, 39b) (see FIG. 3). Will be converted. That is, the large winning opening provided in the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 opens wide until a predetermined time or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and during this time, the player can acquire many game balls. Granted.

When the game ball is won in the first start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random value at the time of winning detection is the small hit value), the special figure variation display game. As a result of the above, a specific result mode (small hit result mode) is derived from the displayed symbol, and a small hit state is obtained. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a small hit result mode. In the present embodiment, the big hit random value is also used for the small hit determination, but the small hit value (small hit determination value) is different from the big hit value (big hit determination value).

At this time, the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 are converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined short time by energizing the large winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b (see FIG. 3). Since the full opening time of the big winning opening is shorter in the small hit state (small hit game state) than in the big hit state (special game state), the game that the player can acquire in the small hit state than in the big hit state. The value (number of balls acquired) is small. In both the small hit state and the big hit state, the big winning opening is open, but the big hit state may be referred to as the first special gaming state, and the small hit state may be referred to as the second special gaming state.

Here, the difference between a big hit and a small hit will be described.

A big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device, and a small hit is a specific result without the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure fluctuation display game, and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and it is special as a special electric accessory. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning devices 38, 39 is set. The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned specific flag is not set as in the case of winning a small hit lottery, for example. The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on / off electrically. Further, "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term that has the meaning of.

Specifically, in the case of a big hit, the special variable winning device is opened by setting the big hit flag, whereas in the case of a small hit, the special variable winning device is set by setting the small hit flag. Is released.

The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be configured as separate displays or the same display, but the special figure variation display games are not executed at the same time. Is set.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game.

Further, although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the count switch (38a). , 39a) includes a coil for magnetic detection, and a non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball by utilizing the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. in use. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main body frame opening detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 or the like is a machine. A micro switch having a specific contact can be used.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the game control system of the game machine 10. The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100 (main board), and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls a game, and is a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer). The data bus 140 that connects the CPU unit 110 having the 111, the input unit 120 having the input port, the output unit 130 having the output port, the driver, etc., the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. And so on.

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates an operating clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. A predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 to enable operation. Will be done.

The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 having an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply and a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V and DC5V from the voltage of DC32V. A backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the gaming microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal or reset signal that notifies the game control device 100 of the occurrence or recovery of a power failure. It is provided with a control signal generation unit 430 and the like that generate and output a control signal such as.

In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are on separate boards or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, mainly. It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the embodiment. By providing it, it is possible to exclude it from the target of replacement and reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or even after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed down and turned on, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111c in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forced. The process of initializing to is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

Further, the game control device 100 (main board) includes a setting key switch 93. The setting key switch 93 makes it possible to change the probability set value (set value) according to the setting related to the game condition (game) by turning it on by the rotation operation of the operator or the like. The RAM initialization switch 112 can also be used as a setting value change switch that can change the probability setting value according to the operation of the operator. In the present embodiment, the probability setting value is a setting value for setting a winning probability such as a big hit probability or a small hit probability, but other game conditions (such as production) other than the probability are also changed according to the probability setting value. It is possible. The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 constitute a setting changing means (setting changing device 42) capable of changing the setting (probability setting value) related to the game condition. In addition to the RAM initialization switch 112, another switch may also serve as the setting value changing switch, or may provide a dedicated setting value changing switch.

The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are provided on the game control device 100 inside the game machine 10 and are arranged at positions that cannot be operated (positions that cannot be accessed) unless the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened. Will be done. That is, a general player cannot access and operate the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112.

As will be described later, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on (power failure recovery, power recovery), the gaming machine 10 sets a probability setting value according to the on / off state of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112. It is possible to shift to various states such as a changeable setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) and a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed.

In the present embodiment, the probability setting value is defined in, for example, 6 steps, and the probability setting value 1 (setting 1), the probability setting value 2 (setting 2), the probability setting value 3 (setting 3), and the probability setting value 4 (setting). 4), there are a probability setting value 5 (setting 5) and a probability setting value 6 (setting 6). In general, setting 1 is the most disadvantageous setting for the player, and setting 6 is the most advantageous setting for the player. Settings 1 and 2 are low settings, settings 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (intermediate settings), and settings 5 and 6 are high settings.

In the probability setting change process, every time the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed by the operator, the work setting value (setting) in the work setting value area is set to the setting value 0 (setting 1, probability setting value 1) →. Setting value 1 (setting 2, probability setting value 2) → setting value 2 (setting 3, probability setting value 3) → setting value 3 (setting 4, probability setting value 4) → setting value 4 (setting 5, probability setting value 5) ) → Setting value 5 (Setting 6, probability setting value 6) → Setting value 0 (Setting 1) → Setting value 1 (Setting 2) → ... In this way, the RAM initialization switch 112 also functions as a set value change switch. For convenience of explanation, the work setting values 0 to 5 are provided corresponding to the probability setting values 1 to 6 in the setting change state (setting change mode), but the work setting value and the probability setting value are the same. They may be treated as the same in the numerical range (that is, 0 to 5 or 1 to 6) (the work setting value and the probability setting value are set to the same numerical value).

Instead of operating the RAM initialization switch 112 (setting value changing switch), the setting key switch 93 may be rotated to a predetermined position to change the probability setting value. Moreover, the probability setting value is not limited to 6 steps. Then, the performance display device 152 in which the display probability setting value corresponding to the selected work setting values 0 to 5 is, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dot Dp) display. Etc. are displayed.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111b, and a RAM (random access memory) 111c that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111b non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control. The RAM 111c is used as a work area of the CPU 111a and a storage area for various signals and random values during game control. Information about the game (game information) is stored, and the stored information is stored even if a power failure occurs. Is a possible retention and storage means. As the ROM 111b or the RAM 111c, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to refer to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start storage to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), which is a fluctuation pattern after the reach state, and fluctuations before the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes an advantageous gaming state (special gaming state) for the player when the special result mode is adopted, a part of the plurality of display results is already derived and displayed at a stage where it is not yet derived. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the conditions for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. Refers to a display mode that does not exist. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas of the display device. After displaying, when the variation display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variation display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example,). The state in which the variable display is stopped due to the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the conditions for the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas are satisfied (for example, the same identification information). (However, the special result mode is excluded) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from the reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as a system (type) of reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode (big hit mode) is different (expectations are different), normal reach (N reach), Special 1 reach (SP1 reach), special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected degree (expected value) of the jackpot increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. Further, the reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variable display game. That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived (when it is out of order) in the special figure variable display game. Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is a state in which there is a high possibility that a big hit will occur as compared with the case where the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a big hit random number for determining a big hit in a special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining a big hit symbol, and a small hit for determining a small hit symbol. With a random number generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers, etc. for determining fluctuation patterns in symbol random numbers and special figure fluctuation display games (including the execution time of fluctuation display games in various reach and fluctuation display without reach). , Equipped with a clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) for the CPU 111a based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock that gives an update timing of the random number generation circuit. ing.

Further, the CPU 111a acquires any one of the variation pattern tables from the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b in the process related to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111a determines the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state, and the start storage number. Based on the above, one of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables. Here, the CPU 111a serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b when the special figure variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize ball. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit 600, and controls for paying out the lending ball.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 (panel radio wave sensor) for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a gate switch 34a of the normal starting gate 34, and a starting port 1 in the first starting winning opening 36. Switch 36a, starting port 2 switch 37a in the second starting winning opening 37 (ordinary variable winning device), winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35, large winning opening switch 43 of the special variable winning opening devices 38, 39 (lower big winning device) It is connected to the mouth switch 38a and the upper prize opening switch 39a), and a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches is input to a 0V-5V positive logic signal. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 for conversion is provided.

Further, the interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is connected to the specific area switch 72, the remaining ball discharge port switch 73, and the out ball detection switch 74. The specific area switch 72 detects the passage of the game ball (V winning) to the specific area 86 (V winning opening). The remaining ball discharge port switch 73 detects a game ball that has passed through the remaining ball discharge port that discharges the game ball from the special variable winning devices 38, 39. The out ball detection switch 74 may detect only the game ball passing through the out port 30b, or may detect all the game balls launched into the game area and finished the game.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124, or the fourth input port 126, and is read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 43 are input to the third input port 124. ..

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the second input port 123.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the specific area switch 72, the remaining ball discharge port switch 73, or the out ball detection switch 74 is input to the fourth input port 126.

Further, the second input port 123 has a detection signal of a magnetic sensor switch 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10, and a glass frame opening detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10. A signal from the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main body frame opening detection switch) provided on the switch 63, the front frame 12 (main body frame), etc., and a signal from the vibration sensor 65 that detects the vibration of the game machine 10 are input. ..

Further, the second input port 123 takes in the setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to the test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the third input port 124 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124. be able to. The same applies to the second input port 123, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input unit 120 indicates a frame radio wave illegal signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shoot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow. The first input port 122 that takes in the overflow switch signal, the touch switch signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24, and the signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 and supplies them to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Is provided. The overflow switch signal is a signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored (full) in the lower plate 23. The frame radio wave illegal signal is a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame) detecting the radio wave, and the payout busy signal is in a state where the payout control device 200 can accept a command. It is a signal indicating whether or not.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122, and is taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RST is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130 to turn off the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test firing test device. It is configured as follows.

Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset in order to prevent the system from malfunctioning, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged in a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that the one-way communication is such that a signal cannot be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of the accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like are transmitted via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start port switch output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the gaming machine controls the game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state cannot be achieved.

The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not go through the buffer, and the like. There is. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 has a solenoid (general electric solenoid) 37c connected to the data bus 140 to open the normal variable winning device 37, and a lower large winning opening solenoid 38b (large winning opening) to open the first special variable winning device 38. Solenoid 1), upper prize opening solenoid 39b (large prize opening solenoid 2) for opening the second special variable winning device 39, and lever solenoid 86b for operating the lever to open the specific area 86. Two output ports 134 are provided.

Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal 71. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, and information about the game machine 10 can be externally transmitted. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signals of the peripheral current solenoid 37c and the winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal (drive). Circuit) 138a, batch display device output from the second driver 138b and fourth output port 136 that output the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135. The third driver 138c that outputs the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the current drawing side of 50, and the fourth that outputs the external information signal supplied to the external device such as the management device from the fifth output port 137 to the external information terminal 71. A driver 138d is provided.

DC32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a current is passed through the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and a current is drawn from the cathode terminal via the digit wire by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in, and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of bilateral communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can send and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the transmission / reception of such data is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the serial data (control data, lighting pattern data, character code (character code), etc.) output from the second output port 134, and receives the performance display device 152 (status display device). A driver 150 for driving is provided. In the present embodiment, the performance display device 152 is composed of a plurality of (4) 7-segment type (8-segment type including dot Dp) display (LED lamp), and the driver 150 is an LED driver. It is not limited to.

The performance display device 152 is provided on the game control device 100 (main board), but may be provided at another location. For example, the performance display device 152 can display a display probability setting value, an accessory ratio, a ball ejection rate, and the number of ejected balls.

Here, the number of ejected balls is the number of game balls ejected from the game area 32 (also referred to as the number of out balls), and the number of game balls that have passed through the winning opening (the number of winning balls) and the game that has passed through the out opening 30b. It is the total with the number of spheres. The number of ejected balls can be obtained by counting the signal of the out ball detection switch 74 or the like. In the present embodiment, the winning openings include a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting opening 1), a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2), and Special variable winning devices 38 and 39 (large winning openings) are included.

The payout rate is the ratio (ratio) of the total number of prize balls to the number of ejected balls (or the number of launched balls), and is calculated by (number of acquired balls ÷ number of ejected balls) × 100 (%). That is, the payout rate is the number of acquired balls (total number of prize balls) per 100 ejected balls.

For example, the bonus ratio is in the jackpot state among the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by winning a prize in the winning opening during a predetermined period (for example, from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present). It is the ratio (%) (= so-called continuous prize ratio) of the number of prize balls (the number of balls acquired by the character) obtained by winning the big prize opening. In addition, the prize ratio may be the ratio of the number of prize balls (during the big hit state and the small hit state) obtained by winning the big prize opening (= big prize opening ratio) among the total number of prize balls. Or, the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize in the large winning opening and the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening) (= the so-called bonus ratio (total bonus ratio) commonly used. )) May be used.

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub-board) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram of the effect control system of the gaming machine 10.

The effect control device 300 is for displaying images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 like the game microcomputer 111. It is equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speaker 19.

The main control microcomputer 311 holds a program ROM 321 consisting of a program executed by the CPU and a PROM (programmable read-only memory) that stores various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. A possible FeRAM 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timing means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect content, instructs the VDP 312 about the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 of the playback sound, lights the decorative lamp, and the motor. And the drive control of the solenoid, the management of the production time, etc. are executed.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is input. It should be noted that the VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM. The wait signal WAIT etc. for the purpose is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal sync signal HSYNC, and a vertical sync signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

A sound ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The effect control command signal (effect command) is a decorative special figure hold number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via the command I / F331. Receive as. Since the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. There is.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a panel decoration LED control circuit 332 and a glass frame 15 for driving and controlling a panel decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect provided on a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 and a game board 30 (including a center case 40) for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, a frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided. A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling a device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. The board decoration device 46 may include the above-mentioned lamp display device 80.

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. It should be noted that a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided on the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and a motor in the board effect device 44. A function to detect the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) that detects the initial position and input a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and a volume control switch provided in the effect control device 300. A switch input circuit 336 that detects the state of the 335 and inputs the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and the electronic components controlled by the effect control device 300. DC32V, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motor and LED, DC5V for power supply voltage of command I / F331, DC15V for driving motor, LED and speaker It is configured to do.

Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, the DC- is used to generate DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. In addition, VDP312 (VDPREST signal), sound source LSI314, amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, control circuit 332-334 (IORESET) that drives and controls lamps, motors, etc., as output from the main control microcomputer 311. It is supplied to the signal) and puts them in the reset state. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

Next, the game control performed in these control circuits will be described. The CPU 111a of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random value for hit determination in the normal figure based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal figure start gate 34, and ROM 111b. Compared with the judgment value stored in, the hit / miss of the normal map fluctuation display game is judged.

Then, after displaying the identification symbol variable for a predetermined time on the normal map display, a normal map variable display game for stopping and displaying is displayed. When the result of the normal fluctuation display game is a hit, a special result mode is displayed on the normal figure display, the normal electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is operated for a predetermined time (for example,). (0.3 seconds) Control to open as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). If the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is out of sync, the normal map display is controlled to display the result mode of the out of alignment.

Further, the start winning prize (starting memory) is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, and the jackpot determination of the special figure 1 variation display game is made based on the starting memory. The random value for use is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b, and the hit / miss of the special figure 1 variation display game is determined.

Further, the start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37, and the random value for jackpot determination of the special figure 2 variable display game is stored based on the start memory. Is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b, and the hit / miss of the special figure 2 variation display game is determined.

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game to the effect control device 300. Then, the special figure variation display game in which the identification symbol is variablely displayed for a predetermined time and then stopped and displayed is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37) of the game ball flowing down the game area 32. Make.

Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling light emission of various LEDs based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a hit, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and generates a special game state. Let me. In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111a controls, for example, to open the opening / closing door 39c of the special variable winning device 39 by the large winning opening solenoid 39b so that the game ball can flow into the special winning opening. ..

Then, either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the big winning opening, or a predetermined opening time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses from the opening of the big winning opening. One round (R) is to open the big winning opening until the above condition is achieved, and this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 times, 11 times or 2 times) control (cycle game). I do. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of alignment, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state (probability change state) is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than that of the normal probability state. Further, regardless of which of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game results in a high probability state, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game Both are in a high probability state.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 are controlled to be in the normal fluctuation operating state, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 per unit time is controlled as compared with the case where the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the normal operating state. Since it is controlled so that the opening time of the game is substantially increased, the normal electric power support state is set. Even in the high probability state (normal probability change state) excluding the latent probability change state, the time saving state is duplicated and the normal electric support (electric support) is executed.

For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to shorten the time so that the execution time (normal map fluctuation time) of the above-mentioned normal map fluctuation display game is set to the second variable display time shorter than the normal first variable display time (for example). 10,000 msec is 1000 msec). In the time-reduced state, the execution time of the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation time) is also shorter than usual, and the time reduction variation of the special figure fluctuation display game is also executed.

Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map fluctuation display game to be a second stop time (for example, 704 msec) shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec). Is.

Further, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) is the first opening time (for example, 100 msec) in the normal state. It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer (for example, 1352 msec).

Further, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened (the number of times the normal electric power is opened) is larger than the number of times the first opening time (for example, 2 times) is obtained with respect to the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second opening number (for example, 4 times). Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to set the probability (normal probability) of the hit result of the normal map fluctuation display game to be higher than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operating state.

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the normal fluctuation time, the normal stop time, the number of times the normal power is opened, the normal power opening time, and the normal power probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. As a result, in the time saving state, the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 becomes easier than in the normal gaming state, and the number of executions of the special figure variation display game per unit time can be increased as compared with the normal gaming state. It is also possible to set multiple types of time saving states that change different things. Further, it may be set so that the movable member 37b is not opened in the normal operating state (probability of normal drawing is 0). Further, in the case of a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Further, the high-probability state and the time-saving state can be generated independently, and both can be generated at the same time, or only one can be generated.

[Transition state when power is turned on]
FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a transition state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on (power restoration). As described above, depending on the on / off state of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 at the time of turning on the power, the state shifts to four states (modes) as shown in FIG.

First, when the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on when the power is turned on, the probability setting value (setting value) can be changed in the setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode). (See A1027-A1036 and FIG. 8 in FIG. 6B).

Next, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on but the RAM initialization switch 112 is off when the power is turned on, the state shifts to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed (FIG. 6B A1031-A1036 and FIG. 8).

If the setting key switch 93 is off but the RAM initialization switch 112 is on when the power is turned on, the state shifts to the RAM initialization state (RAM clear mode) and the RAM initialization process (RAM clear). The process) is executed to initialize the RAM 111c (see A1042-1444 in FIG. 6B).

If the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off when the power is turned on, the state shifts to the normal power recovery state (normal power recovery mode), and the power is simply restored.

[Control of game control device]
Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 7 performed in a predetermined time cycle (4 msec (milliseconds) in this embodiment). That is, the game control program corresponding to the control processing of the game microcomputer 111 is composed of a main program (caller routine) corresponding to the main processing and an interrupt processing program (interrupt processing routine) corresponding to the timer interrupt processing. ..

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main process will be described. 6A and 6B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the main processing by the game control device 100. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In the flowchart of the process executed by the game control device 100, the code (number) of the step is represented as "A ***".

As shown in FIG. 6A, when the game control device 100 starts the main process, it first executes a process of disabling interrupts (A1001). Further, the stack pointer setting process for setting the stack pointer, which is the start address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs, is executed (A1002).

Subsequently, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, when the RAM address is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a firing prohibition signal and sets the firing permission signal to the prohibited state (A1005). The firing permission signal is set to the prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing prohibition signal, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 (A1006). That is, the signals from the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read.

Further, the game control device 100 sets a power supply delay timer (A1007). A program of a slave control means (for example, a payout control device 200 or an effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to instructions from a game control device 100 that is a main control means by setting a predetermined initial value in the power delay timer. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting until is normally started is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first, and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can prevent the command from being missed. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

Further, the timing of the power supply delay timer is performed using a storage area (RAM area or register, etc. that is not subject to the validity determination) that is not subject to the validity determination (checksum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

By reading the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be reliably detected. That is, if the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read after the standby time has elapsed, the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be operated or the power is turned on after the standby time has elapsed. It is necessary to continue to operate the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 from the time until the elapse of the standby time. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 performed at the time of turning on the power cannot be accepted without performing such a troublesome operation. Can be prevented.

When the power delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes time counting of the standby time and a process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (A1008 to A1010).

When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first reads the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus to determine whether or not a power failure has occurred. (A1008). When a power failure occurs (the result of A1008 is "Y"), the machine waits until the power of the gaming machine is turned off.

When the power failure has not occurred (the result of A1008 is "N"), the game control device 100 updates the power-on delay timer by -1 (A1009), and determines whether or not the value of the timer is 0. (A1010). If the value of the timer is not 0 (the result of A1010 is "N"), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to the process of step A1008.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the start of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the value of the timer is 0 (the result of A1010 is "Y"), that is, when the standby time has expired, the game control device 100 has a read / write RWM (read / write) such as RAM or EEPROM. (Memory) access is permitted (A1011), and off-data is output (set to no output) to all output ports (A1012).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port previously mounted on the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in the present embodiment) (A1013). ).

Further, here, the driver 150 for driving the performance display device 152 (status display device) may be initially set. The game control device 100 writes a command including control data corresponding to the contents of the initial setting to the transmission buffer of the second output port 134 (serial communication circuit) and transmits the command to the driver 150. For example, the game control device 100 sets the duty ratio in the initial setting. The duty ratio corresponds to the brightness of each LED (each segment) of the performance display device 152. The game control device 100 sets the number of digits used in the performance display device 152 in the initial setting. In this embodiment, the number of digits used is four.

Next, the game control device 100 activates a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator) (A1014). The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator has a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) with respect to the CPU 111a based on the divided signal. It also includes a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets a RAM abnormality flag indicating an abnormality in the RAM (here, RAM111c) (A1015). Here, the flag on the premise of abnormality is once set in a predetermined register.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data (A1016). Then, if it is normal (the result of A1016 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data (A1017).

Further, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1017 is “Y”), the game control device 100 calculates a checksum of a predetermined area (for example, a game control work area) in the RWM. The calculation process is executed (A1018), and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum and the checksum when the power is turned off match (A1019). If the checksums match (the result of A1019 is "Y"), the RAM is normal and the RAM error flag indicating a RAM error is cleared (A1020). After that, the process proceeds to step A1021.

Further, when the game control device 100 determines that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (the result of A1016 is "N" or the result of A1017 is "N"), the checksums do not match. (The result of A1019 is "N"), the process proceeds to the process of step A1021 without clearing the RAM error flag.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (A1021). When both switches are on (the result of A1021 is "Y"), the game control device 100 shifts to the setting variable state (setting change mode), and executes the process during the probability setting change in steps A1027-A1037. ..

When at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is "N"), the game control device 100 sets a RAM abnormality flag indicating an abnormality in the RAM (here, RAM111c). It is determined whether or not it has been done (A1022). When the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1022 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (A1023). When the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1023 is "N"), the process of confirming the probability setting in step A1031-A1037 (during the setting confirmation state or the setting confirmation mode), in step A1041-1044. The RAM initialization process (RAM clear process) or the process at the time of normal power-on (power recovery) in steps A1041, A1045, and A1046 is executed.

The game control device 100 notifies that the game control device 100 (main board, main board) has an abnormality when the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A1023 is “Y”). An error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A1024). The effect control device 300 that has received the command for notifying the main abnormality error notifies that there is an abnormality in the game control device 100.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 uses the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 to display the 7-segment display data (data of the error display of "E1" in FIG. 9C) when the game is stopped on the performance display device 152. Is output to (A1025). Then, the on-data of the security signal for notifying the external device (game hall internal management device (hall computer), information collecting terminal, etc.) of the abnormality is output to the external information terminal 71 (A1026). Here, even if the information regarding the jackpot remains in the RAM 111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the jackpot signal are maintained in the off state. After that, the processes of steps A1025 and A1026 are repeated to wait, and the setting change operation (both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are turned on) is performed again to wait for the power to be turned on. Note that while the processes of steps A1025 and A1026 are repeated to wait and wait, the interrupt remains disabled (A1001), and the timer interrupt process capable of executing the special figure 1 and 2 game process and the normal figure game process is executed. Since (Fig. 7) cannot be executed, the game (special figure variation display game, normal map variation display game) cannot be executed.

As described above, it is assumed that there is an abnormality when the setting changing operation (both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are turned on) is not executed, but the probability setting changing flag is set. , A1024-A1026 is executed. For example, when the power is turned off and restarted while the probability setting is being changed (before the setting change is completed), the probability setting changing flag may be set even though the setting change operation has not been executed. be.

On the other hand, even when the RAM abnormality flag is set (the result of A1022 is "Y"), the game control device 100 notifies that the game control device 100 (main board) has an abnormality in the main abnormality error notification. The command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A1024), and the 7-segment display data (data of the error display of "E1" in FIG. 9C) when the game is stopped is output to the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 (A1025). ), The on-data of the security signal is output to the external information terminal 71 in order to notify the external device of the RAM abnormality (A1026). As described above, even when the information regarding the jackpot remains in the RAM 111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the jackpot signal are maintained in the off state. After that, the processes of steps A1025 and A1026 are repeated to wait.

When both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (the result of A1021 is “Y”), the game control device 100 starts the process of changing the probability setting (during the variable setting state). First, it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is set (A1027). When the RAM error flag is set (the result of A1027 is "Y"), it is unknown whether the probability setting value is correct, so the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c is cleared. Then, after setting the initial value (for example, the minimum setting value "1") (A1028), the probability setting changing flag indicating that the probability setting is being changed is set (A1029). When the RAM error flag is not set (the result of A1027 is "N"), the probability setting changing flag is set without clearing the probability setting value (A1029). Next, the command for which the probability setting is being changed is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1030), and the process proceeds to step A1034. The effect control device 300 that has received the command for changing the probability setting notifies the display device 41 or the like that the probability setting is being changed.

In the game control device 100, at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is "N"), and the RAM error flag is not set (the result of A1022 is "N"). ), And when the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1023 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is on (A1031). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1031 is "Y"), the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned off, and the processing during the probability setting confirmation (setting confirmation state) starts, and the probability Probability indicating that the setting is being confirmed Set the setting confirmation flag (A1032). Then, the command under confirmation of probability setting is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1033), and the process proceeds to step A1034. The effect control device 300 that has received the command for changing the probability setting notifies the display device 41 or the like that the probability setting is being confirmed.

After step A1030 or step A1033, the game control device 100 executes the processes of steps A1034 to A1040 as common processes during the probability setting change and the probability setting confirmation.

First, the game control device 100 saves 128 ms (predetermined time) in the security signal control timer area in order to output a security signal while the probability setting is being changed and the probability setting is being confirmed (A1034). The count of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the probability setting change / confirmation process (FIG. 8) described later, but the rest if the probability setting change or the probability setting confirmation is completed early. The count of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed by the external information editing process (A1321). The security signal is output for at least 50 ms while the probability setting is being changed and the probability setting is being confirmed.

Next, the game control device 100 permits interrupts (A1035). As a result, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) can be executed. Then, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is off (A1036). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1036 is "N"), it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred (A1037). If no power failure has occurred (the result of A1037 is "N"), the process returns to step A1036. On the other hand, when a power failure has occurred (the result of A1037 is "Y"), the process at the time of the power failure of step A1055-A1061 is executed.

In this way, as long as the setting key switch 93 is on and a power failure has not occurred, it is possible to confirm the setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) in which the probability setting value can be changed, or the probability setting value. The setting confirmation status (setting confirmation mode) is continued.

On the other hand, when the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1036 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prohibits interrupts (A1038), and issues a command to end the notification to the effect control device 300 (effect control board). (A1039). The effect control device 300 that has received the command to end the notification ends the notification that the probability setting is being confirmed or the probability setting is being changed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set, that is, whether or not the probability setting is being changed so far (A1040). When the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A1040 is "Y"), that is, when the probability setting is being changed so far, the RAM initialization process (described later) in step A1042-A1044 is executed. do. On the other hand, when the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1040 is "N"), that is, when the probability setting is being confirmed so far, when the power is turned on after step A1045 (when the power is restored). Performs normal processing of.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the RAM initialization switch 112 is on when the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1031 is “N”) (A1041). When the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (the result of A1041 is “Y”), the RAM area other than the probability set value area for storing the probability set value is cleared to 0 in the RAM 111c (A1042). That is, the game information stored in the RAM 111c is cleared to 0 except for the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area. Further, the above-mentioned probability setting changing flag is also cleared here. Further, in addition to the probability setting value area, a configuration that does not clear the stack area or an unused area, or a configuration that does not clear the work area and the stack area related to the performance information and its display (performance display) is also possible. .. The performance information is derived based on the number of prize balls obtained by winning, for example, the ball ejection rate, the base value (the ball ejection rate in the normal gaming state), the bonus ratio, the number of ejected balls, and the like. be.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1043). Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1044), and the process proceeds to step A1047.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1041 is “N”), both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off, so that a normal power supply is used. The process at the time of turning on (when the power is restored) is started, and the power failure restoration process is executed (A1045). For example, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery (power recovery) is saved in the area to be initialized. In addition, the above-mentioned probability setting confirmation flag is also cleared here. Next, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1046), and step A1047. Move to the processing of.

The command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1044 and the command at the time of recovery from a power failure transmitted in the process of step A1046 include a model designation command indicating the type of the game machine and the hold of special figures 1 and 2. Ornament special figure 1 indicating the number Hold number command and decoration special figure 2 Hold number command, probability information command indicating the presence or absence of a probability state (high probability state or low probability state) or time saving state, special figure change in a predetermined production mode It includes a production count information command that indicates the number of times the display game has been executed, and a power failure recovery command that indicates that the power has been turned on.

Further, the command at the time of RAM initialization and the command at the time of power failure recovery include a setting value information command (probability setting value information command) indicating setting value information which is information of the probability setting value (setting value) of the game machine 10. Is done. The game control device 100 only needs to transmit the set value information command to the effect control device 300 only once when the power is restored (turned on), and thereafter, the effect control device 300 refers to the set value information stored by itself. You can control the production.

The RAM initialization command also includes a RAM initialization command (RAM clear command). The effect control device 300 that has received the RAM initialization command displays, for example, a customer waiting demo on the display device 41, and notifies 30 of the RAM initialization (RAM clear) by the sound of the LED and the speaker of the board decoration device 46 and the like. Do it for a second. Further, the command at the time of power failure recovery includes a screen designation command for designating the display contents of the screen of the display device 41. The screen-designated command is a customer-waiting demo command for both Special Figures 1 and 2 during normal processing (when neither fluctuating nor hitting), and is a recovery screen command otherwise.

After step A1044 or step A1046, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1047). Specifically, the CPU 111a sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set.

The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the extracted random number bits (arrangement before the upper bit transposition) by exchanging them in a predetermined order and storing them as different bit arrangements (arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that determines.

In the present embodiment, by exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, the game control device 100 extracts the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of turning on the power, and corresponds to various initial value random numbers (big hit symbol random numbers for determining the jackpot symbol). Initial value (big hit symbol initial value random number), small hit symbol random number that determines the small hit symbol (small hit symbol initial value random number), initial value of the hit random number that determines the hit of the normal figure (hit initial value random number) , The initial value of the fall lottery random number used in the fall lottery (fall lottery initial value random number), etc.) is saved in a predetermined area of the RWM (A1048), and interruption is permitted (A1049). In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in the present embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the start value (initial value) of various initial random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it can be difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers (A1050). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the fall lottery random number are configured to be generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. There is. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the operating clock of the CPU, and the jackpot symbol random number, hit random number, and fall lottery random number are timer interrupts that are processing units of the program. It is a "slow counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) that has the same cycle as the processing.

In addition, for big hit symbol random numbers, hit symbol random numbers, and fall lottery random numbers, a so-called "initial value change method" is adopted in which the start value is changed using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number makes a round. ing. It should be noted that each random number may be a counter-type update by +1 or 1, or a random-type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number, the hit random number, and the fall lottery random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prohibits interrupts (A1051) and executes a performance display editing process for editing performance information and its display (performance display) (A1052). Here, the performance information (such as the accessory ratio and the ball output rate) may be calculated. Further, when the RAM error flag is set in the register, the work area and the stack area related to the performance information and its display (performance display) may be cleared (if not cleared in step A1042). After that, interrupts are permitted (A1053). As a result, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) can be executed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a power failure has occurred (A1054). If no power failure has occurred (result of A1054 is “N”), the process returns to step A1050. As a result, the process of step A1050-A1054 is repeated until a power failure occurs.

When a power failure occurs (the result of A1054 is "Y"), the game control device 100 starts processing at the time of a power failure, temporarily disables interrupts (A1055), and outputs off-data to all output ports (A1055). 1056). After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1057), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (A1058). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off is executed (A1059), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1060). Finally, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1061), and the machine waits until the power of the gaming machine is turned off.

In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program). The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the timer interrupt process is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 100 first designates the register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM start address in the predetermined register (A1302). By switching from the register bank 0 used in the main processing to the register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt processing, it is equivalent to saving the register used in the main processing. When the timer interrupt processing is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 executes input from various sensors and switches, capture of signals, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (A1303). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed based on the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting checking flag (A1304). When the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed (the result of A1304 is "Y"), the probability setting change / confirmation process for changing or confirming the probability setting value is executed (A1305).

When the game control device 100 is neither changing the probability setting nor confirming the probability setting (the result of A1304 is "N"), the game control device 100 is based on the output data set in various processes, such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 38b, 39b). Output processing for performing actuator drive control and the like is executed (A1306). When a launch prohibition signal is output in the process of step A1005 in the main process, the launch permission signal is output by performing this output process, and the launch permission signal can be set to the permitted state.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a payout command transmission process (A1307) that outputs commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, and further, random number update process 1 (A1308), random number update. Process 2 (A1309) is executed. After that, monitoring whether there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the lower winning opening switch 38a, and the upper winning opening switch 39a, and monitoring the error. (A1310), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process for performing (whether the front frame or the glass frame is opened, etc.) is executed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not abnormal discharge of the game ball is occurring at the large winning opening (A1311). When the abnormal discharge occurring flag is set by the abnormal discharge monitoring process (A1320) described later, it can be determined that the abnormal discharge is occurring. When the abnormal discharge is occurring (the result of A1311 is “Y”), the processes after step A1317 are executed.

The game control device 100 performs a start port switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning of the start port by the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a when the abnormal discharge is not occurring (the result of A1311 is “N”). Execute (A1312). Subsequently, the special figure 1 game process for processing the special figure 1 variable display game is executed (A1313), and then the special figure 2 game process for performing the special figure 2 variable display game is executed (A1314). The details of the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a normal map game process that performs a process related to the normal map variation display game (A1315). A segment LED editing process is executed (A1316), which is provided in the gaming machine 10 and drives a segment LED for displaying a special figure variation game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents (A1316).

Further, the game control device 100 executes a magnet fraud monitoring process of checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether or not there is an abnormality (A1317). Further, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) for checking the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board and determining whether or not there is an abnormality is executed (A1318).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a vibration fraud monitoring process for monitoring fraud due to vibration based on the input from the vibration sensor 65 (A1319). Next, an abnormal discharge monitoring process for monitoring abnormal discharge from the large winning opening is executed (A1320). In the abnormal discharge monitoring process, the special variable winning device 38, 39 has a large winning opening switch 43 (lower winning opening switch 38a, upper winning opening switch 39a), a specific area switch 72 (V winning opening switch), and a remaining ball ejection port. Based on the input from the switch 73, the abnormal discharge of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 is monitored, and when the abnormal discharge occurs, the abnormal discharge occurring flag is set. The game ball that has passed through the large winning opening switch 43 of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 passes through the specific area switch 72 (V winning opening switch) or the remaining ball ejection port switch 73 and is discharged.

Next, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1321). Then, the performance display monitor control process for controlling the display of the performance display device 152 is executed (A1322). After that, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

When the timer interrupt process returns, the interrupt disabled state is restored and the register bank specification is automatically restored. However, depending on the CPU used, interrupts are permitted after the external information editing process. Processing or processing to return the designation of the register bank to register bank 0 may be performed.

[Probability setting change / confirmation process]
Next, the details of the probability setting change / confirmation process (A1305) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the probability setting change / confirmation process. In the probability setting change / confirmation process, the probability setting value can be changed or confirmed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the probability set value is within the normal range (A2401). The probability set value here is stored in the probability set value area of the RAM 111c.

When the probability set value is within the normal range (the result of A2401 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the probability set value display data corresponding to the probability set value (A2402), and the performance display device 152. Is output via the driver 150 (A2404). When the probability setting value is not within the normal range (the result of A2401 is "N"), the extinguishing data is set as the probability setting value display data (A2403), and the data is output to the performance display device 152 via the driver 150 (A2404). ).

Here, the probability set value display data is display probability set value data displayed on the performance display device 152, and is stored in the probability set value display data area. In addition, in order to prevent confusion among people involved in the hall, if the probability setting values are different but the same jackpot probability (and small hit probability), the display probability setting value is associated with the jackpot probability (and small hit probability). May be the same. That is, the same display probability setting value may mean the same big hit probability (and small hit probability).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the security signal control timer is not 0 (A2405). The security signal control timer is 128 ms (predetermined time) set in step A1034. Subsequently, the on-data of the security signal for notifying the external device (game hall internal management device (hall computer) or the like) of the abnormality is output to the external information terminal 71 (A1026). Here, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the jackpot signal are maintained in the off state.

After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (A2407). When the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A2407 is "N"), that is, when the probability setting is being confirmed, the probability setting change / confirmation process is terminated without doing anything.

The game control device 100 is the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on when the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A2407 is "Y"), that is, when the probability setting is being changed. Whether or not it is determined (A2408). When it is the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (the result of A2408 is "Y"), the probability setting change / confirmation process is terminated. This is to prevent a situation in which the probability set value is unintentionally updated when the RAM initialization switch 112 is held down.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input of the RAM initialization switch 112 when it is not the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (the result of A2408 is “N”) (A2409). When there is no input of the RAM initialization switch (the result of A2409 is "N"), the probability setting change / confirmation process is terminated.

When the game control device 100 has an input of the RAM initialization switch 112 (the result of A2409 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the work set value in the work set value area (in the RAM 111c or the register) in the range of 0 to 5. Along with updating by +1 the probability setting values 1 to 6 in the probability setting value area are updated by +1 according to the work setting value (A2410). As a result, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is updated by 1 each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated. After that, the probability setting change / confirmation process is terminated. In the work setting value area (RAM111c or register) for storing the work setting value when the setting change mode is entered, the value corresponding to the probability setting value read from the probability setting value area (1 from the probability setting value). The subtracted value) may be stored.

In the above, every time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is directly updated in response to the update of the work setting value, but the work setting value of the RAM 111c is updated. The probability setting value (work setting value) during setting change is stored in the area, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off and the setting change work is completed (the result of A1036 is "Y"), the work setting The value corresponding to the working setting value in the value area may be stored in the probability setting value area for the first time. By doing so, when a power failure occurs during the setting change (the result of A1037 is "Y"), the probability setting value (probability setting stored in the probability setting value area) used for game control, effect control, etc. It is possible to prevent the situation where the value) is changed by an unintended value.

[Display example on a performance display device]
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a display example of the performance display device 152. The performance display device 152 is a 4-digit 7-segment type (8-segment type including dot Dp) display, but each digit of the performance display device 152 is an 8-segment a, b, c, d, e, It consists of f, g, and Dp.

In the example of FIG. 9A, while the probability setting is being changed, a lighting display of "SET" is displayed in the digits 1 to 3 to indicate that the setting is being changed. On the other hand, in the digit 0, the display probability setting value is, for example, "1" to "6" corresponding to the work setting value 0 to 5 which is switched every time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated while the probability setting is changed. It switches and is lit up.

In the example of FIG. 9B, when the probability setting value is not within the normal range and is abnormal (the result of A2401 is “N”), the extinguishing data is set as the probability setting value display data (A2403), and the digit 0. Turns off. In the digits 1 to 3, the display of "SET" indicating that the setting is being changed is not turned off.

In the example of FIG. 9C, when the RAM is abnormal when the power is turned on (the result of A1022 is "Y"), or when the power is turned off and restarted while the probability setting is being changed (before the setting change is completed). (The result of A1023 is "Y"), and the 7-segment display data error display "E1" when the game is stopped is lit and displayed in digits 1 and 2 (A1024).

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (A1312) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the start port switch monitoring process.

First, the game control device 100 prepares a starting port 1 winning monitoring table (A2701) for monitoring the winning of the first starting winning opening 36 (starting port 1), and acquires a hard random number as a big hit random number. Is executed (A2702). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a start opening prize in the first start winning opening 36 (A2703). Then, if there is no starting opening prize (the result of A2703 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2709.

In the game control device 100, when there is a start opening prize in the first start winning opening 36 (the result of A2703 is "Y"), the probability of occurrence of a big hit is in a low probability state and there is no time reduction (Public support). It is determined whether or not it is in the state of none), that is, whether or not it is in the special figure low probability & no time reduction (during the normal gaming state) (A2704). If the special figure low probability & no time reduction flag is set in the special figure game mode flag area, it can be determined that the special figure low probability & no time reduction is in progress (during the normal game state). Then, in the case of a low probability state and no time reduction (the result of A2704 is "Y"), that is, in the normal gaming state, the process proceeds to step A2707.

When the game control device 100 is in a state where the probability of occurrence of a big hit is not a low probability state (when it is in a high probability state) or when there is a time reduction (a state where there is a general electric support) (the result of A2704 is "N"). A right-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A2705), and an effect command setting process is executed (A2706). As a result, the effect control device 300 displays the right-handed instruction display for instructing right-handed as a warning when there is a starter winning to the first starting winning opening 36 in the special figure high probability state or the time saving state. Can be displayed on. In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table (A2707) for setting the information of holding by winning the first start winning opening 36 (starting opening 1), and executes the special drawing start opening switch common process (A2708). ).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a starting port 2 winning monitoring table (A2709) for monitoring the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2), and sets a hard random number as a big hit random number. The hard random number acquisition process to be acquired is executed (A2710). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a start opening winning to the normal variable winning device 37 (A2711). If there is no start opening prize (the result of A2711 is "N"), the start opening switch monitoring process is terminated.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the normal variable winning device 37 is operating (during normal electric operation) when there is a start opening winning to the normal variable winning device 37 (the result of A2711 is "Y"). Judgment (A2712). When the normal variable winning device 37 is not operating (the result of A2712 is "N"), it is determined whether or not fraud (Public electric fraud) against the normal variable winning device 37 is occurring (A2713). When the number of fraudulent winnings to the ordinary variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraud occurrence determinations (for example, 5 or more), it can be determined that a general electric fraud is occurring. If the normal variable winning device 37 is being fraudulent (the result of A2713 is "Y"), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated.

When the game control device 100 is not fraudulent with the normal variable winning device 37 (the result of A2713 is "N"), the game control device 100 sets a table for setting the information of the hold due to the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2). Prepare (A2714), execute the special figure start port switch common process (A2715), and end the start port switch monitoring process.

When the game control device 100 is fraudulent with respect to the normal variable winning device 37 (the result of A2712 is “Y”), the game control device 100 does not execute the process of step A2713, but executes the processes of steps A2714 and A2715.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special start port switch common process (A2708, A2715) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a procedure of common processing for the special drawing start port switch. The special figure start port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each of the inputs of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a.

First, the game control device 100 outputs information regarding the number of winnings to the monitoring target start port switch among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a to the external management device of the game machine 10. The start port signal output number of times is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether or not the output number of times overflows (A2903). When the number of outputs does not overflow (the result of A2903 is "N"), the updated value is saved in the start port signal output count area of the RWM (A2904), and the process proceeds to step A2905. On the other hand, when the number of output times overflows (the result of A2903 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A2905. In the present embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port signal output frequency region. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is configured to determine that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, in the game control device 100, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, whether or not the number of special figure reservations (starting memory number) to be updated corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored is less than the upper limit value. (A2905). If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "N"), the special figure start port switch common processing is terminated. If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "Y"), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (the number of special figure 1 hold or the number of special figure 2 hold) is updated by +1. Then (A2906), the target start opening winning flag is saved (A2907).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the start port switch to be monitored and the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reserved special figures (A2908), and stores the jackpot random number prepared in step A2702 in the RWM jackpot random number. Save to the area (A2909). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (A2910), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2911).

After that, the game control device 100 extracts and prepares a fall lottery random number for drawing a fall from a high probability state to a low probability state of the jackpot probability of the special figure (A2912), and stores the fall lottery random number. Save to the area (A2913).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the prize is given to the normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2) (A2914). If the prize is not won in the normal variable winning device 37 (the result of A2914 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2917. On the other hand, when the winning is to the starting winning opening 36 (the result of A2914 is "Y"), the small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (A2915), and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2916). ).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the variation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (A2917), and executes the special figure reservation information determination process (A2918). Then, a start port switch to be monitored and a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number are prepared as effect commands (A2919), and the effect command setting process (A2920) is executed to be common to the special figure start port switch. End the process. The decorative special figure hold number command is a decorative special figure 1 hold number command at the start port 1 switch 36a, and a decorative special figure 2 hold number command at the start port 2 switch 37a.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the start winning opening 36 and the starting winning area of the normal variable winning device 37, and becomes the right to execute the variable display game. It serves as a start storage means for storing a predetermined number as a start memory up to an upper limit. Further, the start storage means (game control device 100) uses various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening (starting winning opening 36) as the first starting storage up to a predetermined number. It is stored, and various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (A2918) in the above-mentioned special figure start port switch common process will be described. 12A and 12B are flowcharts showing the procedures of the first half and the second half of the special figure reservation information determination process (look-ahead process, pre-determination process). The special figure reservation information determination process is executed for the special figure 1 and 2 start memory generated based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the jackpot is in progress (during a special game state) (A3001). When the big hit is in progress (the result of A3001 is "Y"), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated. When it is not a big hit (the result of A3001 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the prize is won in the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A3002). The pre-reading process (preliminary determination process) is executed when the winning is to the starting opening 1 (the result of A3002 is "Y"), that is, when the winning is to the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1). Therefore, the process proceeds to the process after step A3004.

If the game control device 100 does not win a prize in the starting port 1 (the result of A3002 is "N"), is the probability of occurrence of a big hit a low probability state and a state without time reduction (a state without general electric support)? It is determined whether or not, that is, whether or not the special figure has a low probability and no time reduction (normal gaming state) (A3003). When the special figure low probability & no time reduction is in progress (the result of A3003 is "Y"), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. That is, in the case of winning a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2) in the normal gaming state, the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated without executing the look-ahead process (preliminary determination process). In the normal game state, as will be described later, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game often fluctuates for a long time (long fluctuation) and is forcibly terminated with a disengagement result. Do not execute.

The game control device 100 is a normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2) when the special figure is low probability & no time reduction (the result of A3003 is "N"), that is, in a state other than the normal game state (time reduction state or probability change state). ), In order to execute the look-ahead process (preliminary determination process), the process proceeds to the process after step A3004.

Then, the game control device 100 starts a look-ahead process (preliminary determination process), and determines whether or not the probability of occurrence of a big hit is in a high probability state, that is, whether or not it is in a special figure high probability (A3004). .. When the special figure high probability flag (in this embodiment, the special figure high probability & the time saving flag) is set in the special figure game mode flag area, it can be determined that the special figure high probability is in progress. When the special figure is in high probability (the result of A3004 is "Y"), it is determined whether the random number of the fall lottery prepared in step A2912 is within the judgment value range of the fall winning (A3005), and the look-ahead fall lottery corresponding to the judgment result is determined. An information command is prepared as an effect command (A3006), and an effect command setting process is performed (A3007). Next, the game control device 100 prepares a low-probability determination flag for performing a look-ahead jackpot determination in a low-probability state (A3008). If the special figure is not in high probability (the result of A3004 is "N"), there is no fall from the high probability state to the low probability state in the first place. Move to the processing of A3008.

After that, the game control device 100 executes the look-ahead jackpot determination process described later based on the jackpot random number prepared in step A2909 (A3009), and determines whether or not the determination result of the look-ahead jackpot determination process is a jackpot (A3010). ). When the determination result is a big hit (the result of A3010 is "Y"), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch (start port 1 switch 36a or start port 2 switch 37a) is set (A3011). , The stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared jackpot symbol random number is acquired (A3012), and the process proceeds to step A3019.

When the determination result of the look-ahead jackpot determination process is out of order (the result of A3010 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the prize is won in the normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2). (A3013). When a prize is won in the starting port 2 (the result of A3013 is "Y"), a small hit can occur in the special figure 2 variable display game executed by winning the starting port 2, so a look-ahead regarding the small hit is possible. As a process, a small hit determination process described later is executed (A3014), and it is determined whether or not the determination result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (A3015). Then, when the determination result is a small hit (the result of A3015 is "Y"), the small hit symbol random number check table is set (A3016), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared small hit symbol random number is acquired (). A3017), the process proceeds to step A3019.

When the game control device 100 does not win a prize in the starting port 2 (the result of A3013 is "N"), since a small hit cannot be generated in the special figure 1 variation display game, the stop symbol information of the loss is set (A3018). ). That is, when the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the stop symbol information of the deviation is set. Further, when the judgment result is not a small hit (the result of A3015 is "N"), that is, when the judgment result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the stop symbol information of the deviation is set. (A3018). After that, the process proceeds to step A3019.

After steps A3012, A3017, and A3018, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol information in the symbol information area (A3019). The stop symbol information in the symbol information area is also used in the variation pattern setting process (A3038) described later. Then, a look-ahead stop symbol command (low probability) for low probability corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information is prepared as an effect command (A3020), and the effect command setting process is executed (A3021).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a high-probability determination flag for performing a look-ahead jackpot determination in a high-probability state (A3022), and executes the process of A3023-A3032 in the same manner as A3009-A3018. First, the look-ahead jackpot determination process described later is executed (A3023), and it is determined whether or not the determination result of the look-ahead jackpot determination process is a jackpot (A3024). When the determination result is a big hit (the result of A3024 is "Y"), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch (start port 1 switch 36a or start port 2 switch 37a) is set (A3025). , The stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared jackpot symbol random number is acquired (A3026), and the process proceeds to step A3033.

When the determination result of the look-ahead jackpot determination process is out of order (the result of A3024 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the prize is won in the normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2). (A3027). When the starting port 2 is won (the result of A3027 is "Y"), a small hit can occur in the special figure 2 variable display game executed by winning the starting port 2, so a look-ahead regarding the small hit is possible. As a process, a small hit determination process described later is executed (A3028), and it is determined whether or not the determination result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (A3029). Then, when the determination result is a small hit (the result of A3029 is "Y"), the small hit symbol random number check table is set (A3030), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared small hit symbol random number is acquired (). A3031), the process proceeds to step A3033.

When the game control device 100 does not win a prize in the starting port 2 (the result of A3027 is "N"), since a small hit cannot be generated in the special figure 1 variable display game, the stop symbol information of the loss is set (A3032). ). That is, when the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the stop symbol information of the deviation is set. Further, when the judgment result is not a small hit (the result of A3029 is "N"), that is, when the judgment result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the stop symbol information of the deviation is set. (A3032). After that, the process proceeds to step A3033.

After steps A3026, A3031, and A3032, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure is in high probability (A3033). When the special figure is in high probability (the result of A3033 is "Y"), the stop symbol information is overwritten and saved in the symbol information area (A3034), and the process proceeds to step A3035. The stop symbol information in the symbol information area is also used in the variation pattern setting process (A3038) described later. When the special figure is not in high probability (the result of A3033 is "N"), the process proceeds to the process of step A3035 without overwriting the stop symbol information in the symbol information area.

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a look-ahead stop symbol command (high probability) for high probability corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information as an effect command (A3035), and executes the effect command setting process (A3035). A3036).

Subsequently, the special figure information setting process for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is executed (A3037), and the variation pattern setting process for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is executed as a look-ahead. (A3038). Then, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number indicating the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared as an effect command (A3039), the effect command setting process is executed (A3040), and the special figure hold information determination process is performed. finish.

The effect control device 300 receives both the look-ahead stop symbol command (low probability) and the look-ahead stop symbol command (high probability), but if the jackpot probability at the time of receiving is a low probability state, the look-ahead stop symbol command ( (Low probability) is used to execute look-ahead symbol command processing (Fig. 51), and if the jackpot probability when received is in a high probability state, look-ahead symbol command processing (high probability) is used to perform look-ahead symbol command processing. (FIG. 51) may be executed.

[Look-ahead jackpot judgment processing]
Next, the details of the look-ahead jackpot determination process (A3009, A3023) in the special figure hold information determination process will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the look-ahead jackpot determination process.

The game control device 100 first sets a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value (A3101), and determines whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A3102). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

When the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A3102 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the determination result to be off (other than the jackpot) (A3107), and performs the look-ahead jackpot determination process. finish.

Further, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A3102 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the determination flag is a high probability determination flag (A3103). Then, when the determination flag is a high probability determination flag (the result of A3103 is "Y"), the upper limit determination value in the high probability corresponding to the probability setting value is set (A3104). On the other hand, when the judgment flag is not the high probability judgment flag (when the judgment flag is the low probability judgment flag) (the result of A3103 is "N"), the upper limit judgment value in the low probability corresponding to the probability setting value is set (A3105). ).

When the upper limit determination value of the value of the jackpot random number is set, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (A3106). When the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A3106 is "Y"), a deviation (other than the jackpot) is set as the determination result (A3107). On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A3106 is "N"), the jackpot is set as the determination result (A3108). When the determination result is set, the look-ahead jackpot determination process ends.

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 game processing (A1313) in the timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 game processing.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 variation display game is being interrupted is set (A3201).

When the special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted is not set (the result of A3201 is "N"), the game control device 100 is a big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game. It is determined whether or not the player is in a state or a small hit state (A3202). Special Figure 2 When neither the big hit state nor the small hit state of the variable display game (the result of A3202 is "N"), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is executed (A3203). In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball in the lower large winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the upper large winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. Monitor detection. Then, the specific area switch specific area switch monitoring process for monitoring the input from the specific area switch 72 is executed (A3204).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 (subtracts only 1) if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (A3205). Special figure 1 The game processing timer is clocked by the interrupt cycle (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by updating -1. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. In the case of the big hit medium state or the small hit state of the special figure 2 variation display game (the result of A3202 is “Y”), the process of step A3205 is performed without the process of steps A3203 and A3204. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (A3206). Special figure 1 When the game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A3206 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A3217.

When the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3206 is "Y"), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the game control device 100 is assigned to the special figure 1 game processing number. A special figure 1 game sequence branch table referred to for branching to the corresponding process is set in the register (A3207). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is acquired by using the special figure 1 game sequence branch table (A3208). Subsequently, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure 1 game processing number, and the game branch processing according to the special figure 1 game processing number is executed (A3209).

When the game processing number is "0" in step A3209, the game control device 100 monitors the variation start of the special figure 1 variation display game, and sets the variation start of the special figure 1 variation display game and the effect setting. In addition, special figure 1 normal processing for setting information necessary for performing special figure 1 changing processing is executed (A3210). The details of the special drawing 1 normal processing will be described later in FIG.

When the game processing number is "1" in step A3209, the game control device 100 sets the stop display time of the special figure 1 and sets the information necessary for performing the processing during the display of the special figure 1. Special Figure 1 Performing variable processing is executed (A3211). The details of the processing during the change in FIG. 1 will be described later with reference to FIG. 35.

When the game processing number is "2" in step A3209, the game control device 100 sets a jackpot fanfare command according to the type of jackpot if the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a jackpot. The special figure 1 display processing for setting the fanfare time according to the big winning opening opening pattern of each big hit, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like is executed (A3212). The details of the processing during display of Special Figure 1 will be described later with reference to FIG. 37.

When the game processing number is "3" in step A3209, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the big winning opening, updates the number of opening times, and performs the processing during the opening of the big winning opening. The fanfare / interval processing for setting and the like is executed (A3213). The details of the fanfare / interval processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

When the game processing number is "4" in step A3209, the game control device 100 sets an interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting an ending command if it is the final round. The processing during the opening of the large winning opening is executed (A3214), in which information necessary for processing the remaining balls of the large winning opening is set.

When the game processing number is "5" in step A3209, the game control device 100 performs a process of setting an interval time and an ending time, a process of setting information necessary for performing a big hit end process, and the like. The mouth residual ball treatment is executed (A3215).

When the game processing number is "6" in step A3209, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 game wait time value (described later), and special figure 1 information necessary for executing normal processing. (A3216), the special figure 1 big hit end process for setting and the like is executed. The details of the special figure 1 big hit end process will be described later in FIG. 40.

When the processing based on the special figure 1 game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares the special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (A3217), and then displays the special figure 1. The symbol variation control process related to the device 51 is executed (A3218), the lever solenoid control process for controlling the lever solenoid 86b is executed (A3219), and the special figure 1 game process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 variation display game is being interrupted is set (the result of A3201 is "Y"), the game control device 100 processes the steps A3202 to A3216. After preparing the special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (A3217), the symbol fluctuation control process related to the special figure 1 display 51 is executed (A3218). , The lever solenoid control process for controlling the lever solenoid 86b is executed (A3219), and the special figure 1 game process is terminated. In this way, when the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, the time counting (update) of the variable time timer (special figure 1 game processing timer) for measuring the variable time is stopped. It should be noted that, by the symbol variation control process, the variation of the special symbol itself may apparently continue on the special figure 1 display 51.

[Special Figure 2 Game Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 game processing (A1314) in the timer interrupt processing will be described. 15A and 15B are flowcharts showing the procedures of the first half and the second half of the special figure 2 game processing.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is in the jackpot state (A3301). Special Figure 1 When the variable display game is not in the jackpot state (the result of A3301 is “N”), the jackpot switch monitoring process is executed (A3302). In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball in the lower large winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the upper large winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. Monitor detection. Then, the specific area switch monitoring process for monitoring the input from the specific area switch 72 is executed (A3303).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 (subtracts only 1) if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (A3304). Special figure 2 The game processing timer is clocked by the interrupt cycle (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by updating -1. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0.

When the game control device 100 is in the jackpot state of the special figure 1 variation display game (the result of A3301 is “Y”), the game control device 100 performs the process of step A3304 without performing the processes of steps A3302 and A3303.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (A3305). Special figure 2 When the game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A3305 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A3323.

When the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3305 is “Y”), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the game control device 100 is of the special figure 2 game processing timer. It is determined whether or not the number of repetitions is 0 (A3306). When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A3306 is "N"), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (A3307), and the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated. A timer value for length variation (for example, 60,000 msec (60 seconds)) is saved in the area (A3308). As will be described later, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game has long fluctuations and the fluctuation time is long (for example, 10 minutes), the fluctuation time timer cannot be set with 2 bytes. Therefore, steps A3306-A3308 A timer with a long fluctuation time for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is prepared by repeating the counting of the timer value for long fluctuations for the number of repetitions by the process of.

In the game control device 100, when the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3305 is “Y”) and the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3306 is “Y”). , The special figure 2 game sequence branch table referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is set in the register (A3309). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is acquired by using the special figure 2 game sequence branch table (A3310). Subsequently, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure 2 game processing number, and the game branch processing according to the special figure 2 game processing number is executed (A3311).

When the game processing number is "0" in step A3311, the game control device 100 monitors the variation start of the special figure 2 variation display game, and sets the variation start of the special figure 2 variation display game and the effect setting. In addition, special figure 2 normal processing for setting information necessary for performing special figure 2 changing processing is executed (A3312). The details of the special drawing 2 normal processing will be described later in FIG.

When the game processing number is "1" in step A3311, the game control device 100 sets the stop display time of the special figure 2, sets the information necessary for performing the processing during the display of the special figure 2, and the like. Special Figure 2 Performing variable processing is executed (A3313). The details of the processing during the change in FIG. 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. 36.

When the game processing number is "2" in step A3311, the game control device 100 sets a jackpot fanfare command according to the type of jackpot if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a jackpot. Special Figure 2 Displaying processing is executed, which sets the fanfare time according to the big winning opening opening pattern of each big hit, sets the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like (A3314). The details of the process during display of Special Figure 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. 38.

When the game processing number is "3" in step A3311, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the big winning opening, updates the number of opening times, and performs the processing during the opening of the big winning opening. The fanfare / interval processing for setting and the like is executed (A3315). The fanfare / interval processing is common to that executed in the special figure 1 game processing, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

When the game processing number is "4" in step A3311, the game control device 100 sets an interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting an ending command if it is the final round. The processing during the opening of the large winning opening is executed (A3316), in which information necessary for processing the remaining balls of the large winning opening is set.

When the game processing number is "5" in step A3311, the game control device 100 performs a process of setting an interval time and an ending time, a process of setting information necessary for performing a big hit end process, and the like. The mouth residual ball treatment is executed (A3317).

When the game processing number is "6" in step A3311, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 jackpot end process for setting the information necessary for executing the special figure 2 normal process (the special figure 2 jackpot end process). A3318). The details of the special figure 2 big hit end process will be described later in FIG. 41.

When the game processing number is "7" in step A3311, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the large winning opening, updates the number of opening times, sets the information necessary for performing the small hit middle processing, and the like. (A3319). The details of the small hit fanfare process will be described later in FIG. 45.

When the game processing number is "8" in step A3311, the game control device 100 performs a process of setting a small hit end command, a small amount of information necessary for performing a small hit remaining ball process, and the like. The hit process is executed (A3320).

When the game processing number is "9" in step A3311, the game control device 100 performs a process of setting an ending time, a small amount of information necessary for performing a special figure 2 small hit end process, and the like. The hit residual ball processing is executed (A3321).

When the game processing number is "10" in step A3311, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 small hit end process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure 2 normal process. (A3322). The details of the special figure 2 small hit end process will be described later in FIG. 46.

When the processing based on the special figure 2 game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares the special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (A3323), and then displays the special figure 2. The symbol variation control process related to the device 52 is executed (A3324), the lever solenoid control process for controlling the lever solenoid 86b is executed (A3325), and the special figure 2 game process is terminated.

[Special Figure 1 Normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 normal processing (A3210) in the special figure 1 game processing will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special drawing 1 normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game can start variation (A3401). If the special figure 1 variable display game cannot start variable (if the variable start is not possible) (the result of A3401 is "N"), the special figure 1 normal processing number "0" is set as the special figure 1 game processing number. (A3416), save in the special figure 1 game processing number area of RWM (A3417). Here, from the end of the big hit fluctuation of the special figure 2 variation display game (during processing during the special figure 2 display) to the end of the big hit operation (special figure 2 big hit end processing), and in the special figure 2 variation display game. From the end of the fluctuation of the small hit (during the processing during the display of the special figure 2) to the end of the small hit operation (processing of the end of the small hit of the special figure 2), it is said that the special figure 1 variation display game cannot start the fluctuation.

When the special figure 1 variation display game can start variation (the result of A3401 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the left-handed instruction has been notified (A3402). If the left-handed instruction notification command has already been prepared as an effect command and transmitted to the effect control device 300, it can be determined that the left-handed instruction notification has been completed. If the left-handed instruction has been notified (the result of A3402 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A3406.

When the left-handed instruction notification has not been notified based on the left-handed instruction notification flag (the result of A3402 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares the left-handed instruction notification command as an effect command (A3403), and prepares the left-handed instruction notification command (A3403). (A3404), and set the left-handed instruction notification flag indicating that the left-handed instruction is notified (displayed) on the display device 41 or the like (A3405).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of holdings in FIG. 1 is 0 (A3406). When the special figure 1 hold number is 0 (the result of A3406 is "Y"), the special figure 1 normal processing number "0" is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area of the RWM (A3402). As a result, the special figure 1 normal processing is repeated until the number of reserved special figures 1 becomes 1 or more.

When the special figure 1 hold number is not 0 (the result of A3406 is "N"), the game control device 100 has variable start probability information corresponding to the presence or absence of the current probability state (low probability state or high probability state) and the time saving state. The command is prepared as an effect command (A3407), and the effect command setting process is executed (A3408). Subsequently, the special figure 1 variation start process for starting the special figure 1 variation display game is executed (A3409). After that, a decorative special figure hold number command (decorative special figure 1 hold number command) corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared as an effect command (A3410), and the effect command setting process is executed (A3411).

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a remaining game count command as an effect command corresponding to the time reduction variation number, which is the number of remaining special figure variation display games in the time saving state (A3412), and executes the effect command setting process. (A3413). The effect control device 300 that has received the remaining game count command can grasp the time reduction fluctuation count.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the information during the change of the special figure 1 in the special figure status area in the RWM (information addition) (A3414). Here, the information of the special figure 1 changing or (the special figure 1 changing + the special figure 2 changing) is set in the special figure status area. Next, the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process, which is the process for shifting to the special figure 1 changing process, is executed (A3415). In the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process, for example, the process number “1” is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area.

[Special Figure 2 Normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 normal processing (A3312) in the special figure 2 game processing will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special drawing 2 normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game can start variation (A3501). If the special figure 2 variable display game cannot start variable (if the variable start is not possible) (the result of A3501 is "N"), the special figure 2 normal processing number "0" is set as the special figure 2 game processing number. (A3518), save in the special figure 2 game processing number area of RWM (A3519). Here, the special figure 2 variation display game fluctuates from the end of the big hit fluctuation of the special figure 1 variable display game (during processing during the special figure 1 display) to the end of the big hit operation (special figure 1 big hit end processing). Not startable.

When the special figure 2 variation display game can start variable (the result of A3501 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (A3502). Special figure 2 When the number of holdings is not 0 (the result of A3502 is "N"), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the presence or absence of the current probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or the time saving state is prepared as an effect command. Then (A3503), the effect command setting process is executed (A3504). Subsequently, the special figure 2 variation start process for starting the special figure 2 variation display game is executed (A3505).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure hold number command (decorative special figure 2 hold number command) corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number as an effect command (A3506), and executes the effect command setting process (A3506). A3507). After that, the game control device 100 prepares a remaining game count command corresponding to the time shortening fluctuation number, which is the number of remaining special figure fluctuation display games in the time saving state, as an effect command (A3508), and executes the effect command setting process. (A3509). The effect control device 300 that has received the remaining game count command can grasp the time reduction fluctuation count.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the information during the change of the special figure 2 in the special figure status area in the RWM (information addition) (A3510). Here, the information of the special figure 2 changing or (the special figure 1 changing + the special figure 2 changing) is set in the special figure status area. Next, the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process, which is the process for shifting to the special figure 2 changing process, is executed (A3511). In the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process, for example, the process number “1” is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area.

When the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (the result of A3502 is "Y"), the game control device 100 has a special figure 2.
It is determined whether or not the number of pending special figures 1 is 0 (A3512). When the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (the result of A3512 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed) (A3513). When the special figure 1 is not changing (the result of A3513 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration has been started (A3514). If the customer waiting demo has not started (the result of A3514 is "N"), the customer waiting demo in progress flag is set (A3515).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state as an effect command (A3516), and executes the effect command setting process (A3517). The effect control device 300 that has received the customer waiting demo command can execute the customer waiting demo on the display device 41. After that, the special figure 2 normal processing number "0" is set as the special figure 2 game processing number (A3518), and the game is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area of the RWM (A3519). As a result, the special figure 2 normal processing is repeated until the special figure 2 hold number becomes 1.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved special figures 1 is not 0 (the result of A3512 is "N"), the special figure 1 variable display game will be executed. As the game processing number, the special figure 2 normal processing number "0" is set (A3518), and the game is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area of the RWM (A3519). In addition, even when the special figure 1 is changing (the result of A3513 is "Y") or the customer waiting demo has been started (the result of A3514 is "Y"), the customer waiting demo command is prepared, etc. Instead, the special figure 2 normal processing number "0" is set as the special figure 2 game processing number (A3518), and the game is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area of the RWM (A3519).

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (A3409) in the special figure 1 normal processing will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing.

The game control device 100 first sets the special figure 1 information setting flag (A3601a). The special figure 1 information setting flag is used for setting fluctuation information (including distribution of look-ahead fluctuation patterns). Next, a random number is loaded from the special figure 1 fall lottery random number storage area (for the number of hold 1), prepared (A3602a), and the special figure 1 fall lottery random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (A3603a). , The fall lottery process described later is executed (A3604a). It should be noted that the reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3605a) for setting the jackpot information and the jackpot information for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is a jackpot, and the special figure. 1 Special figure 1 Stop symbol setting process (A3606a) related to the setting of the stop symbol (symbol information), Special figure 1 Special figure 1 Information setting to set the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display game. The process (A3607a) is executed.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set (A3608a). ). Subsequently, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3609a) for setting the fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation mode in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, and the fluctuation start information setting process for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (A3609a). A3610a) is executed. Then, the time reduction variation number update process for updating the time reduction variation number is executed (A3611a).

Next, the game control device 100 sets “1” as the processing number (A3612a) in order to shift to the processing during the change in the special figure 1, and saves the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A3613a). Subsequently, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (A3614a), and the signal relating to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 (on-data of the signal during change of the special symbol 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A3615a).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the changing flag in the variation control flag area of FIG. 1 (A3616a). Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 100 msec) of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the indicator 1 of the special figure 1) is saved in the blinking control timer area of the special figure 1 (A3617a), and the symbol number area during the change of the special figure 1 is saved. The initial value of the changing symbol number (for example, 0 indicating a non-lighting symbol) is saved (A3618a), and the special figure 1 change start process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (A3505) in the special figure 2 normal processing will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing.

In the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing, the "big hit flag 1" in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (FIG. 18) is replaced with the "big hit flag 2", and the "special figure 1" is replaced with the "special figure 2". Since the same processing as that of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing is performed, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that steps A3601b-A3618b in the special figure 2 variation start process correspond to steps A3601a-A3618a in the special figure 1 variation start process, respectively.

[Fall lottery process]
Next, the details of the fall lottery processing (A3604a, A3604b) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fall lottery process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the probability of occurrence of a jackpot is in a high probability state (probability variation state), that is, whether or not it is in a special figure high probability (A3701). If the special figure is not in high probability (the result of A3701 is "N"), the fall lottery process is terminated.

In the game control device 100, when the special figure is in high probability (the result of A3701 is "Y"), the value of the fall lottery random number of the target (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is less than the fall lottery lower limit determination value. Whether or not it is determined (A3702). When it is less than the lower limit determination value of the fall lottery (the result of A3702 is "Y"), the fall lottery process is terminated. When it is equal to or greater than the fall lottery lower limit determination value (the result of A3702 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the value of the target fall lottery random number is larger than the fall lottery upper limit determination value (A3703). When it is larger than the fall lottery upper limit determination value (the result of A3703 is "Y"), the fall lottery process is terminated.

When the game control device 100 is equal to or less than the fall lottery upper limit determination value (the result of A3703 is "N"), the value of the target fall lottery random number becomes a value between the fall lottery upper limit determination value and the fall lottery lower limit determination value. Therefore, the processing at the time of winning the fall lottery is started, and first, the signal regarding the high probability end is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (A3704). Here, the signals relating to the high probability end are off-data (off-signal) of 2 jackpot signals and off-data (off-signal) of 4 jackpot signals. As a result, the signal relating to the high probability termination is output as external information to the external information terminal 71 and thus to an external device (such as a hall computer).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the end of high probability & time saving in the test signal output data area (A3705). The signals related to the end of high probability & time reduction are, for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal off data, special symbol 2 high probability state signal off data, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal off data, special symbol 2 variation. This is the off-data of the time reduction status signal.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the left-handed instruction in the test signal output data area (A3706). Then, the number without time reduction is saved in the game status display number area of the RWM (A3707). The special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area of RWM (A3708), and the fall lottery process is completed. The special figure low probability & no time reduction flag indicates that the probability of a big hit is low and there is no time reduction state (normal game state).

As described above, in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the fall lottery is executed at the start of each special figure fluctuation display game, and when the fall lottery is won, the probabilistic state (high probability state) is changed to the normal gaming state (low). The fall process (A3704-A3708) that falls to the probabilistic state) is executed.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3605a) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

First, the game control device 100 saves the deviation information in the jackpot flag 1 area of the RWM (A3801). Subsequently, the jackpot random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM (A3802). It should be noted that the reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). After that, the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (A3803).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area (A3804). If the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (the result of A3804 is "N"), a jackpot determination process for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a jackpot is executed based on the acquired jackpot random number value (A3805). ), It is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a big hit (A3806). When the result of the determination is a big hit (the result of A3806 is "Y"), the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step A3801 is overwritten with the big hit information and saved (A3807), and the big hit flag 1 setting process is performed. finish. Since the jackpot flag 1 can be a jackpot only when the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (the jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area), it is possible to avoid that the jackpot flag 1 and the jackpot flag 2 are jackpots at the same time. ..

In the game control device 100, when the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (the result of A3804 is "Y"), or when the determination result of the special figure 1 variation display game is not a jackpot (the result of A3806 is "N"), the jackpot Flag 1 Ends the setting process.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process (A3605b) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 2 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the small hit flag 2 area of the RWM (A3901), and saves the deviation information in the big hit flag 2 area of the RWM (A3902). Subsequently, the jackpot random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM (A3903). It should be noted that the reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). After that, the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (A3904).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (A3905). When the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (the result of A3905 is "N"), a jackpot determination process for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a jackpot is executed based on the acquired jackpot random number value (A3906). ), It is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a big hit (A3907). When the result of the determination is a big hit (the result of A3907 is "Y"), the big hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step A3902 is overwritten with the big hit information and saved (A3908), and the big hit flag 2 setting process is performed. finish. Since the jackpot flag 2 can be a jackpot only when the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (the jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area), it is possible to avoid that the jackpot flag 1 and the jackpot flag 2 are jackpots at the same time. ..

The game control device 100 acquires when the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (the result of A3905 is "Y") or when the determination result of the special figure 2 variation display game is not a jackpot (the result of A3907 is "N"). Based on the big hit random value, the small hit determination process for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game is a small hit is executed (A3909), and the result of the determination is determined whether or not it is a small hit (A3909). A3910). In this embodiment, the big hit random value is also used for the small hit determination (in other words, the same random number value is used for the small hit determination and the big hit determination). Special Figure 2 When the variable display game is a small hit (the result of A3910 is "Y"), the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step A3901 is overwritten with the small hit information and saved (A3911). The jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated. If the special figure 2 variation display game is not a small hit (the result of A3910 is “N”), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated without saving the small hit information in the small hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit judgment process]
Next, the details of the jackpot determination processing (A3805, A3906) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process, the jackpot flag 2 setting process, and the like will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot determination process. The jackpot determination process is a process common to the jackpot determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.

The game control device 100 first sets a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value (A4001), and determines whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A4002). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

When the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A4002 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets a deviation (other than the jackpot) as the determination result (A4007), and ends the jackpot determination process. do.

Further, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A4002 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure is in high probability (A4003). Then, when the special figure is in high probability (the result of A4003 is "Y"), the upper limit determination value in high probability corresponding to the probability setting value is set (A4004). On the other hand, when the special figure is not in the high probability (the result of A4003 is "N"), the upper limit determination value in the low probability corresponding to the probability setting value is set (A4005).

When the upper limit determination value of the value of the jackpot random number is set, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (A4006). When the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A4006 is "Y"), a deviation (other than the jackpot) is set as the determination result (A4007). On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A4006 is "N"), the jackpot is set as the determination result (A4008). When the determination result is set, the jackpot determination process ends.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, the details of the small hit determination process (A3909) in the big hit flag 2 setting process and the like will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit determination process. The small hit determination process is a process common to the small hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (A4101). The small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the small hit lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is equal to or less than the determination value, it is determined to be a small hit.

As a matter of course, in order to avoid that the result of the same special figure fluctuation display game is a small hit and a big hit, the range of the small hit judgment value (between the small hit lower limit judgment value and the small hit upper limit judgment value) is the above-mentioned big hit judgment. It does not overlap the range of values (between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value). In this embodiment, the small hit random number is not provided independently, and the big hit random number is also used for the determination of the small hit, but it is also possible to provide the original small hit random number.

When the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (the result of A4101 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets a deviation as the determination result (A4103), and ends the small hit determination process. ..

Further, in the game control device 100, if the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (the result of A4101 is "N"), whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value. (A4102). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (the result of A4102 is "Y"), the deviation is set as the determination result (A4103). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (the result of A4102 is "N"), the small hit is set as the determination result (A4104). When the determination result is set, the small hit determination process ends.

[Big hit probability, small hit probability, fall probability]
25 (a), (b), and 25 (c) are special figure variation display games determined as a result of the above-mentioned big hit determination process (FIG. 23), small hit determination process (FIG. 24), and fall lottery process (FIG. 20). It is a table exemplifying the big hit probability, the small hit probability, and the fall probability of.

In the example of FIG. 25 (a), the jackpot probability (high probability state) in the high probability state is the same regardless of the probability setting values 1 to 6 (settings 1 to 6). On the other hand, the jackpot probability (low probability state) in the low probability state tends to increase as the probability setting value increases (higher setting), and the larger the probability setting value, the more likely the jackpot to occur and the player It will be advantageous. As described above, only one of the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the jackpot probability in the high probability state may be configured to increase as the probability setting value increases. The jackpot probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the upper limit determination value and the lower limit determination value in FIG. 23 by the range of the value of the jackpot random number. The jackpot probability can be changed according to the probability setting value by changing the range of the lower limit determination value or the value of the jackpot random number corresponding to the probability setting value in addition to the upper limit determination value.

Further, in setting 1 and 2, setting 3 and setting 4, or setting 5 and setting 6, the jackpot probability (high probability state) and the jackpot probability (low probability state) are the same. It should be noted that the jackpot probabilities may be different from each other in all settings. Further, even if the jackpot probabilities are the same, the effect control device 300 can execute the effect according to each probability set value (variable effect setting process described later).

In the example of FIG. 25B, the small hit probability is constant regardless of whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state, and regardless of the probability setting value (setting). The small hit probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the small hit upper limit determination value and the small hit lower limit determination value in FIG. 24 by the range of the value of the large hit random number. As shown in FIG. 14, in the special figure 1 variable display game, small hits do not occur (small hit probability is zero). It should be noted that a configuration in which a small hit occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game is also possible.

In the example of FIG. 25 (c), the fall probability as the winning probability of the fall lottery does not depend on the probability setting value (setting), regardless of whether it is in the high probability state or the low probability state, and the special figure. 1 It is constant (1/237) regardless of whether it is a variable display game or a special figure 2 variable display game. The fall probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the fall lottery upper limit determination value and the fall lottery lower limit determination value in FIG. 20 by the range of the value of the fall lottery random number.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A3606a) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (A4201). When the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (the result of A4201 is "Y"), the jackpot symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (A4202). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (A4203), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area of the RWM (A4204). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table (A4205), acquires the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4206). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display device (here, the special figure 1 display device 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Then, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (A4207). The time reduction determination data includes information on whether or not there is a time reduction state (with or without time reduction) after the end of the big hit, and is used in the special figure 1 big hit end process and the special figure 2 big hit end process described later.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number, saves it in the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area of the RWM (A4208), and wins a large prize corresponding to the stop symbol number. The mouth opening information is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 large winning mouth opening information area of RWM (A4209). After that, the process proceeds to step A4212. This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state.

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the result of A4201 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of the loss in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (A4210), and the loss stop symbol pattern. Is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4211). After that, the process proceeds to step A4212.

After steps A4209 and A4211, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern, and saves the decorative special figure 1 command as an effect command in the decorative special figure 1 command area (A4212). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is set.

After that, the game control device 100 executes the effect command setting process (A4213). As a result, the decorative special figure 1 command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4214), and clears the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) to 0 (A4215). ). After that, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (A3606b) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area (A4301). When the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (the result of A4301 is "Y"), the jackpot symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (A4302). Next, the special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (A4303), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area of the RWM (A4304). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table (A4305), acquires the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4306). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special diagram 2 display 52) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Then, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (A4307). The time reduction determination data includes information on whether or not there is a time reduction state (with or without time reduction) after the end of the big hit, and is used in the special figure 1 big hit end process and the special figure 2 big hit end process described later.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number, saves it in the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area of the RWM (A4308), and wins a large prize corresponding to the stop symbol number. The mouth opening information is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 large winning mouth opening information area of RWM (A4309). After that, the process proceeds to step A4317. This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A4301 is "N"), whether or not the small hit flag 2 is a small hit, that is, the small hit information is stored in the small hit flag 2 area. It is determined whether or not the game has been saved (A4310). When the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (the result of A4310 is "Y"), the small hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (A4311). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (A4312), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (A4313). This process selects the type of specific result. Subsequently, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4314). After that, the process proceeds to step A4317.

When the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (the result of A4310 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of loss in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (A4315), and the loss stop symbol pattern. Is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4316). After that, the process proceeds to step A4317.

After steps A4309, A4314, and A4316, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern, and saves the decorative special figure 2 command as an effect command in the decorative special figure 2 command area (A4317). ). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is set.

After that, the game control device 100 executes the effect command setting process (A4318). The decorative special figure 2 command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4319), and clears the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) to 0 (A4320). ), Clear the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) to 0 (A4321). After that, the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

In this way, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of the game ball in the first start winning opening 36, and detects the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37. As a variable display game based on the above, the variable display game execution means for executing the special figure 2 variable display game. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution control means for controlling the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination means (game control device 100).

[Example of special figure jackpot symbol distribution]
FIG. 28 is a table illustrating the distribution of the jackpot type (big hit symbol distribution) of the special figure 1 and 2 variable display games controlled by the above-mentioned special figure 1 stop symbol setting process and special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. Is. It should be noted that the distribution of the type of jackpot is common to each setting (each probability setting value).

FIG. 28 exemplifies a table that defines the types of jackpots corresponding to the jackpot stop symbol numbers acquired in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process and the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process and the distribution rate thereof. In the example of FIG. 28, the types of jackpots are 10R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 10R normal jackpot (time reduction 100 times), which are common to the special figures 1 and 2 variable display games. In addition, a 10R normal big hit (time reduction number 0 times) may be provided.

The fractions of the 10R probable big hit, the 4R probable big hit, and the 10R normal big hit (time reduction 100 times) are 30%, 30%, and 40% in the special figure 1 variable display game, and in the special figure 2 variable display game. It differs by 50%, 10%, and 40%. The distribution rate can be changed as appropriate.

[Special Figure 1 Information Setting Process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 information setting process (A3607a) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 information setting process.

The game control device 100 first sets a variation pattern selection information table (A4401). Then, the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 1 are acquired (A4402).

Here, the first half offset data (variable distribution information 1) is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuations, and the second half offset data (variable distribution information 2) is a table pointer for distributing the second half fluctuations. The first half variation is a variation mode before the start of reach, and the second half variation is a variation mode after the reach state is reached, and corresponds to the type of reach (normal reach, special reach, etc., including no reach).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (A4403), and when the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is not a big hit (the result of A4403 is "N"). ), The value is converted by adding the special figure 1 hold number to the first half offset data in order to distribute the first half fluctuation according to the special figure 1 hold number (A4404). Then, the process proceeds to step A4405.

When the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (the result of A4403 is "Y"), the game control device 100 does not perform the process of step A4404, and updates and converts the first half offset data acquired in step A4402. Instead, the process proceeds to step A4405.

Then, the game control device 100 saves the first half offset data (variable distribution information 1) in the variable distribution information 1 area of the RWM (A4405), and stores the second half offset data (variable distribution information 2) in the variable distribution of the RWM. Save to the information 2 area (A4406), and end the special figure 1 information setting process.

[Special Figure 2 Information Setting Process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 information setting process (A3607b) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 information setting process.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability of occurrence of a big hit is a low probability state and no time reduction (state without normal electric support), that is, a special figure low probability & no time reduction (normal game). It is determined whether or not the condition is (A4501). If there is no special figure low probability & no time reduction (the result of A4501 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A4505.

When the game control device 100 is not in the special figure low probability & time saving state (the result of A4501 is "N"), that is, in the time saving state or the probable change state, the special figure fluctuation display game to be started is finally shortened in time. It is determined whether or not it is a fluctuation (A4502). The time-reduced final variation is a final (for example, 100th) special figure variation display game in a time-reduced state. When the special figure variation display game to be started is the time-reduced final variation (the result of A4502 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A4506.

The game control device 100 sets a variation pattern selection information table (A4503) when the special figure variation display game to be started is not the time-reduced final variation (the result of A4502 is "N"). Then, the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 2 are acquired (A4504). As described above, the first half offset data (variable distribution information 1) is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuations, and the second half offset data (variable distribution information 2) is a table pointer for distributing the second half fluctuations. ..

On the other hand, when the special figure low probability & no time reduction is in progress (the result of A4501 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure variation display game to be started is a high probability final variation. (A4505). Here, the high-probability final fluctuation is a special figure fluctuation display game when the player wins the fall lottery (FIG. 20) and falls from the probabilistic change state (high probability state) to the normal gaming state (low probability state).

The game control device 100 determines when the special figure variation display game to be started is a high-probability final variation (the result of A4505 is "Y") or when the time-reduced final variation is (the result of A4502 is "Y"). ”), In order to secure time for notifying that the final fluctuation is made, the first half offset data and the second half offset data for the final fluctuation are set (A4506), and the process proceeds to step A4511.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit when the special figure variation display game to be started is not a high-probability final variation (the result of A4505 is "N") (the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is "N"). A4507). If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A4507 is "N"), set the first half offset data for the missed / small hit of special figure 2 at the time of low probability (A4508), and process in step A4510. Move to. When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A4507 is “Y”), the first half offset data for the big hit of the special figure 2 at the time of low probability is set (A4509). Subsequently, the latter half offset data for the long-term fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set (A4510). As a result, in the normal gaming state, the special figure 2 variation display game becomes variable (long variation) for a long time.

In the probabilistic state (special figure high probability state) and the time saving state, the latter half offset data for the long-term fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not set, so that the special figure 2 fluctuation display game has a normal fluctuation time fluctuation (special figure 2 fluctuation display game). Short fluctuations compared to long fluctuations). As a result, in the probabilistic state (special figure high probability state) and the time saving state, the small hit RUSH (rush) state in which small hits frequently occur due to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes possible.

After step A4504, A4506 or A4510, the game control device 100 saves the first half offset data (variable distribution information 1) in the variable distribution information 1 area of the RWM (A4511), and saves the latter half offset data (variable distribution information 2). ) Is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area of the RWM (A4512), and the special figure 2 information setting process is terminated.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3609a) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process.

The game control device 100 first sets a variable group address table (A4601a), acquires and prepares the address of the latter half variable group table corresponding to the variable distribution information 2 (A4602a), and prepares the variable group random number (A4602a). The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared as a random number from the 1 storage area (for the number of hold 1) (A4603a).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is out of order (A4604a). If the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is out of order (the result of A4604a is "Y"), the 2-byte distribution process based on the variation pattern random number 1 is executed (A4605a), and the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is out of order. If not (in the case of a big hit or a small hit) (the result of A4604a is "N"), the distribution process based on the variation pattern random number 1 is executed (A4606a). The 2-byte distribution process and the distribution process are processes for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure 1 variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

The structure of the latter half variable group table is different for hit and miss, and the random number for distribution is 1 byte size for hit and 2 byte size for hit. The hit size is set to 1 byte size to save data capacity, but 1 byte is sufficient because the appearance rate of the hit in the special figure 1 variable display game itself is low. In the case of a hit (in the case of a big hit or a small hit), only the lower value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is used.

After step A4605a or A4606a, the game control device 100 acquires and prepares the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of distribution (A4607a). Subsequently, the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded and prepared as a random number from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the holding number 1) of the special figure 1 (A4608a), and the distribution process based on the variation pattern random number 2 is executed (A4609a). .. Then, the latter half variable number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half variable number area (A4610a). The distribution process here is a process for selecting the latter half variation number (second half variation pattern) of the special figure 1 variation display game from the latter half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 2.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half fluctuation group table (A4611a), and calculates the table selection pointer based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (A4612a). Subsequently, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (A4613a). Further, the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded and prepared as a random number from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the reserved number 1) of the special figure 1 (A4614a), and the distribution process based on the variation pattern random number 3 is executed (A4615a). The distribution process here is a process for selecting the first half variation number (first half variation pattern) of the special figure 1 variation display game from the first half variation selection table (first half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 3. be.

Further, the game control device 100 acquires the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution, saves it in the first half variation number area (A4616a), and ends the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process.

By the above processing, the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of the game, from among a plurality of variations.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3609b) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process.

The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process replaces "special figure 1" with "special figure 2" in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (FIG. 31), and is the same process as the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process. Therefore, detailed description will be omitted. Note that steps A4601b-A4616b in the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process correspond to steps A4601a-A4616a in the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process, respectively.

By the above processing, the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of the game, from among a plurality of variations.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the variation start information setting process (A3610a, A3610b) in the special figure 1 variation start process and the special figure 2 variation start process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation start information setting process.

The game control device 100 first clears the random number storage area (for the reserved ball 1) of the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 used in the special figure 1 (A5001).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half fluctuation time value table (A5002) and acquires the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number (A5003). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (A5004), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (A5005).

Then, the game control device 100 adds the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value (A5006), and saves the added value in the target special figure game processing timer area (A5007). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the information is being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (A5008). If the information is not set for the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A5008 is "N"), the information is being set for the special figure 2 variable display game, so the long fluctuation (long-term fluctuation) of the special figure 2 variable display game. (A5009).

When the game control device 100 does not start the length variation of the special figure 2 variation display game (the result of A5009 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves 0 in the repetition count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (A5010), and the special figure 2 2 When the length variation of the variable display game is started (the result of A5009 is “Y”), 9 is saved in the repeat count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (A5011). Special Figure 2 Fluctuation display In the long fluctuation of the game, the fluctuation time (for example, 10 minutes) that is not enough for the 2-byte timer is changed. Therefore, the predetermined number of repetitions (here, 9) of the special figure 2 game processing timer is the number of repetitions. Set in the area. In timer interrupt processing with an interrupt cycle of 4 msec (milliseconds), a 2-byte timer can be set up to about 262 seconds.

For example, when a timer of 60,000 msec (60 seconds) is set by saving the above-mentioned added value in the special figure game processing timer area and the number of repetitions of 9 times is further saved, timer interrupt processing (particularly, special figure 2). The timer is subtracted in the game processing (FIG. 15) (A3304), and when the time is up (the result of A3305 is "Y"), the number of repetitions is subtracted by 1 (A3307). The value of 60,000 ms (60 seconds) is set again (A3308). As a result, the special figure 2 variation display game of long variation can have a long variation time of 60,000 msec + (60,000 msec × 9) = 10 minutes.

The fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game when the fluctuation is not long (number of repetitions = 0) are the first half fluctuations saved in the special figure game processing timer area in step A5007. It is the sum of the time value and the latter half fluctuation time value.

When the game control device 100 is in the process of setting information regarding the special figure 1 variation display game (the result of A5008 is “Y”), the game control device 100 proceeds to step A5012 without setting the number of times the timer is repeated.

After steps A5008, A5010, and A5011, the game control device 100 prepares a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number (A5012), and prepares a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number (A5013). .. Then, the effect command setting process for transmitting the variable command as the effect command is executed (A5014).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the number of special figure reservations (the number of special figure 1 hold or the number of special figure 2 hold) of the target of the special figure change display game to be started by -1 (A5015), and the target special figure change. The content of the random number storage area related to the display game is shifted (A5016), and the empty area after the shift is cleared (A5017). Then, the fluctuation start information setting process is terminated.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination means for determining various random value values stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of the identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Decorate special figure variable display Set detailed production contents in the game. Information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games includes a decorative special figure hold number command including information on the number of start memories (holding number), a decorative special figure command including information on a stop symbol, and a variation of the special figure fluctuation display game. Variable commands including information about the pattern are mentioned, and these commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special figure command before the variable command, the processing by the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Time reduction fluctuation frequency update process]
Next, the details of the time reduction variation number update process (A3611a, A3611b) will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the time reduction variation number update process.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure is in the high probability (probability change state) (A5101). When the special figure high probability flag (in this embodiment, the special figure high probability & the time saving flag) is set in the special figure game mode flag area, it can be determined that the special figure high probability is in progress. When the special figure is in high probability (the result of A5101 is "Y"), the time reduction fluctuation number update process is terminated.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure time reduction is in progress (time reduction state) when the special figure is not in high probability (the result of A5101 is “N”) (A5102). When the special figure game mode flag area is set with the special figure time reduction flag (in this embodiment, the special figure low probability & time reduction flag), it can be determined that the special figure time reduction is in progress. If the special time reduction is not in progress (the result of A5102 is "N"), the time reduction variation number update process is terminated.

The game control device 100 updates the number of time reduction fluctuations by -1 (subtracts only 1) when the special time reduction is in progress (the special figure has a low probability of having a normal electric support) (the result of A5102 is "Y"). ) (A5103). The initial value of the time reduction fluctuation number is the number of fluctuations in which the time saving state is maintained after the end of the big hit, and is set to, for example, 100 times (the big hit end setting process 2 described later). Further, regardless of whether the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game starts to change, the time shortening change number is updated by -1.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of time reduction fluctuations is 0 (A5104). When the time reduction variation number is not 0 (the result of A5104 is "N"), that is, when the time reduction state continues at the start of the next special figure variation display game, the game control device 100 updates the time reduction variation number. End the process. When the number of time reduction fluctuations is 0 (the result of A5104 is "Y"), the game control device 100 saves the signal relating to the time reduction end in the external information output data area (A5105). Here, the signal relating to the end of working hours is off-data of two jackpot signals. As a result, the signal relating to the end of working hours is output as external information to the external information terminal 71 and thus to an external device (such as a hall computer).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the time saving end in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5106). The signals related to the end of the time reduction here are, for example, off-data of the special symbol 1 variable time shortened state signal, off-data of the special symbol 2 variable time shortened state signal, off-data of the normal symbol 1 variable time shortened state signal, and normal electric function. Object 1 Off data of open extension state signal.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the low probability number in the game state display number area (A5107), and saves the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area of the RWM (A5108). , The normal figure time reduction no flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area (A5109), and the time reduction fluctuation number update process is completed.

In this way, by executing the time reduction fluctuation number update process in the second embodiment, the normal gaming state (special figure low probability and normal) is appropriately changed from the time saving state (special figure low probability and state with normal electric support). It is possible to shift to the state without electric support).

[Special Figure 1 Processing during fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 changing process (A3211) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process during the change in Special Figure 1.

First, the game control device 100 updates the number of times the symbol is fixed by +1 (A5301). The number of times the symbol is confirmed is output. Will be done. Next, the decorative special figure 1 command is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area and prepared as an effect command (A5302), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5303). After that, the decorative special figure 1 stop command for stopping the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5304), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5305).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 1 as the display time (stop display time) of the stop symbol of the special figure 1 (A5306). For example, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is 600 msec if the stop symbol pattern is an outlier symbol of the special figure 1, and 2000 msec if the stop symbol pattern is the jackpot symbol of the special figure 1.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is out of order (A5307). If the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of order (the result of A5307 is "Y"), the information saved in the above-mentioned special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of off) is used as the special figure 1 stop symbol. It is loaded from the save area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5322).

In the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not out of order (in the case of a big hit) (the result of A5307 is "N"), the special figure 2 is also changing (the special figure 2 variable display game is also being executed). (A5308). If the special figure 2 is not changing (the result of A5308 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A5319. When the special figure 2 is also changing (the result of the special figure 2 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the processing during the display of the special figure 2 described later is being executed (A5309).

When the special figure 2 display process is being executed (the result of A5309 is “Y”), the game control device 100 shifts to the process of step A5311. When the special figure 2 display processing is not being executed (the result of A5309 is "N"), the number of symbol confirmation counts is updated by +1 (A5310). Subsequently, as the display time of the special figure 2, the display time of a value obtained by adding 4 msec to the display time of the special figure 1 (display time of the special figure 1 + 4 msec) is set (A5311) and displayed in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. Save time (A5312). Here, 4 msec is an interrupt cycle (predetermined time cycle) of timer interrupt processing. The reason why 4 msec is added is that the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (subtracted by 4 msec corresponding to the interrupt cycle) in the next special figure 2 game processing (A3304), so that it is added in excess. As a result, the actual display time of the stop symbol of the special figure 1 and the display time of the stop symbol of the special figure 2 can be made the same. If the stop display of Special Figure 2 has already started, the display time will be reset here (basically, the display time will be extended, but it may be shortened in some cases).

Next, the game control device 100 sets and prepares the out-of-order symbol command of the decorative special figure 2 as an effect command (A5313), saves it in the decorative special figure 2 command area (A5314), and executes the effect command setting process (A5314). A5315). Subsequently, the decorative special figure 2 stop command for stopping the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5316), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5317). After that, the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 for setting to execute the special figure 2 display process is executed (A5318). In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2, the process number "2" is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area, or the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped as a result of being missed.

By the processing of steps A5311 to A5318, the deviation result of the special figure 2 variable display game (including the decorative special figure 2 variable display game) is set in the special figure 1 variable display game, which is the control related to the special figure 1 variable display game. , Execution of special figure 2 display processing (end of special figure 2 variable display game) is set. In this way, even if the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (during the change of special figure 2), if the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a hit result (big hit), the special figure 2 variable display game is missed. As a result, the fluctuation will be forcibly terminated (forced termination).

The special figure 1 changing process is performed at the end of the variable time, that is, when the special figure 1 game processing timer (value of the special figure 1 game processing timer area set in step A5007) is timed up (A3206). Since the result is executed in "Y"), when the special figure 1 variable display game of the hit result stops variable, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly terminated (forced termination).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the decorative special figure 1 command from the decorative special figure 1 command area and saves it in the hit symbol command area (A5319). Next, the round number upper limit value information is loaded from the above-mentioned special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area, saved in the round number upper limit value information area (A5320), and is large from the above-mentioned special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area. The winning opening opening information is loaded and saved in the large winning opening opening information area (A5321). After that, the information saved in the above-mentioned special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5322). Next, the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 (A5323) for setting to execute the special figure 1 display process is executed, and the special figure 1 variable process is terminated. In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1, the special figure 1 is being displayed, such as saving the process number "2" in the special figure 1 game process number area or executing a process of stopping the special figure 1 variable display game. Perform the necessary processing to move to the processing.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 serves as a stop time setting means (display time setting means) for setting a stop time (display time) for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. Further, even if the game control device 100 is executing the special figure 2 variable display game (during the change of the special figure 2), if the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a hit result, the special figure 2 variable display game is removed. It is a forced termination means to force termination with the result.

[Special Figure 2 Processing during fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 changing process (A3313) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the processing during the change in Special Figure 2.

First, the game control device 100 updates the number of times the symbol is fixed by +1 (A5401). The symbol confirmation count output count is used in the symbol confirmation count signal editing process (part of the external information editing process) that outputs the symbol confirmation count signal generated when the stop symbol of the variable display game is fixed to an external device. .. Next, the decorative special figure 2 command is loaded from the decorative special figure 2 command area and prepared as an effect command (A5402), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5403). After that, the decorative special figure 2 stop command for stopping the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5404), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5405).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 2 as the display time (stop display time) of the stop symbol of the special figure 2 (A5406). For example, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is 600 msec if the stop symbol pattern is an outlier symbol of special figure 2, 600 msec if it is a big hit symbol of special figure 2, and 136 msec if it is a small hit symbol of special figure 2. be. The display time of the missed symbol and the big hit symbol of the special figure 2 is the same, but it is longer than the display time of the small hit symbol of the special figure 2.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is out of order (A5407). If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of order (the result of A5407 is "Y"), the information saved in the above-mentioned special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of off) is used as the special figure 2 stop symbol. It is loaded from the save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5427).

If the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is not out of alignment (the result of A5407 is "N"), the game control device 100 also determines whether the special figure 1 is also changing (the special figure 1 variation display game is also running). (A5408). If the special figure 1 is not changing (the result of A5408 is "N"), the process proceeds to the process of step A5423. When the special figure 1 is also changing (the result of the special figure 2 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (A5409).

The game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 game interruption flag when the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is not a big hit (the result of A5409 is "N"), that is, when it is a small hit (A5412). , The decoration special figure 1 interruption command is prepared as an effect command (A5413), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5414). After that, the process proceeds to step A5423. In this way, even if the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (during the change of special figure 1), when the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a small hit, the special figure 1 variable display game becomes the special figure 1 game. It is interrupted by interrupting the measurement of the fluctuation time by the processing timer. In this case, the derivation of the result of the special figure 1 variable display game (display of the stop symbol corresponding to the stop symbol number) is postponed, and the special figure 1 that has been interrupted after the small hit operation related to the special figure 2 variable display game is completed. You can restart the variable display game.

When the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit (the result of A5409 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 display process described later is being executed (). A5410). If the process being displayed in the special figure 1 is being executed (the result of A5410 is “Y”), the process proceeds to the process of step A5415. When the special figure 1 display processing is not being executed (the result of A5410 is "N"), the number of symbol confirmation counts is updated by +1 (A5411). Subsequently, as the display time of the special figure 1, a display time of a value obtained by adding 4 msec to the display time of the special figure 2 (display time of the special figure 2 + 4 msec) is set (A5415) and displayed in the special figure 1 game processing timer area. Save time (A5416). Here, 4 msec is an interrupt cycle (predetermined time cycle) of timer interrupt processing. The reason why 4 msec is added is that the special figure 1 game processing timer is updated by -1 (subtracted by 4 msec corresponding to the interrupt cycle) in the next special figure 1 game processing (A3205), so that it is added in excess. As a result, the actual display time of the stop symbol of the special figure 2 and the display time of the stop symbol of the special figure 1 can be made the same. If the stop display of Special Figure 1 has already started, the display time will be reset here (basically, the display time will be extended, but it may be shortened in some cases).

Next, the game control device 100 sets and prepares the out-of-order symbol command of the decorative special figure 1 as an effect command (A5417), saves it in the decorative special figure 1 command area (A5418), and executes the effect command setting process (A5418). A5419). Subsequently, a decorative special figure 1 stop command for stopping the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5420), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5421). After that, the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 for setting to execute the special figure 1 display process is executed (A5422). In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2, the process number "2" is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area, or the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped as a result of being missed.

By the processing of steps A5415 to A5422, the deviation result of the special figure 1 variable display game (including the decorative special figure 1 variable display game) is set in the special figure 2 variable display game, which is the control related to the special figure 2 variable display game. , Execution of special figure 1 display processing (end of special figure 1 variable display game) is set. In this way, even if the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (during the change of special figure 1), if the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a big hit, the special figure 1 variable display game is forced to be out of order. The fluctuation ends (execution ends).

The special figure 2 changing process is performed at the end of the variable time, that is, when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 and the special figure 2 game processing timer times up (results of A3305 and A3306). Is executed in "Y"), so that when the special figure 2 variable display game of the hit result stops changing, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly terminated (executed).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the decorative special figure 2 command from the decorative special figure 2 command area and saves it in the hit symbol command area (A5423). Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit (A5424). Special Figure 2 When the result of the variable display game is a small hit (the result of A5424 is "Y"), the information saved in the above-mentioned special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of small hit) is displayed in special figure 2. It is loaded from the stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5427).

When the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is not a small hit (when the result is a big hit) (the result of A5424 is "N"), the game control device 100 has the above-mentioned special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area to the round number upper limit. Load the value information and save it in the round number upper limit information area (A5425).
The large winning opening opening information is loaded from the above-mentioned special figure 2 large winning opening opening information area and saved in the large winning opening opening information area (A5426). After that, the information saved in the above-mentioned special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5427). Next, the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (A5428), which sets the setting for executing the special figure 2 display process, is executed (A5428), and the special figure 2 variable process is terminated. In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1, the special figure 2 is being displayed, such as saving the process number "2" in the special figure 2 game process number area or executing a process of stopping the special figure 2 variable display game. Perform the necessary processing to move to the processing.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 serves as a stop time setting means (display time setting means) for setting a stop time (display time) for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. Further, even if the game control device 100 is executing the special figure 1 variable display game (during the change of special figure 1), if the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a hit result, the special figure 1 variable display game is removed. It is a forced termination means to force termination with the result.

[Processing during display of special figure 1]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 display process (A3212) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process during display of the special figure 1.

First, the game control device 100 loads the jackpot flag 1 (indicating the jackpot information or the missed information) from the jackpot flag 1 area (A5701), and clears the jackpot flag 1 area (A5702). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit based on the big hit flag 1 (A5703).

When the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (the result of A5703 is "Y"), the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the start of the special figure 1 big hit in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5704). ). For example, the signal relating to the start of the special figure 1 big hit is the on-data of the signal during operation of the condition device and the on-data of the signal per special symbol 1.

Next, the game control device 100 loads the hit symbol command from the hit symbol command area, prepares it as an effect command (A5705), and executes the effect command setting process (A5706). Since the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, this hit symbol command corresponds to the big hit symbol. Subsequently, a jackpot fanfare command is prepared as an effect command (A5707), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5708).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the signal corresponding to the large winning opening opening information and the probability state in the external information output data area (A5709). The signal here includes on-data (on-signal) of 2 jackpot signals and on-data (on-signal) of 3 jackpot signals. In this embodiment, it does not matter because the 2R jackpot does not exist, but the jackpot 2 signal may be turned off by the 2R probability variation jackpot in the low probability, and the jackpot 3 signal may be turned off by the 2R probability variation jackpot in the high probability. You may.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets the jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the jackpot opening information (A5710), and saves the jackpot fanfare time in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A5711).

Next, the game control device 100 sets "3" as the processing number in order to shift to the fanfare / interval processing (A5712), saves the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A5713), and fanfares. / Interval processing The transition setting processing is executed (A5714), and the special figure 1 display processing is terminated.

In the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing, the processing for shifting to the fanfare / interval processing is executed. Specifically, as the signal relating to the start of the jackpot, the on-data (on-signal) of one jackpot signal and the on-data (on-signal) of four jackpot signals are saved in the external information output data area. In addition, the signal related to the end of high probability & time saving is saved in the test signal output data area, and the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area. Further, the time reduction fluctuation frequency region for holding the time reduction fluctuation frequency is cleared. Also, clear the number of rounds area to 0.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is not a big hit (when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit) (the result of A5703 is "N"), that is, the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is If it is out of alignment, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game executed this time has a high probability final variation (A5715). The high-probability final fluctuation is a special figure fluctuation display game when the fall lottery (FIG. 20) is won. If it is not a high-probability final variation (the result of A5715 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game executed this time is a time-reduced final variation (A5716). The time reduction final variation is the final (for example, 100th) special figure variation display game in the time reduction state. When the time reduction is not the final variation (the result of A5716 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A5724.

The game control device 100 has a probability information command (low) indicating a low probability when it is a high-probability final variation (result of A5715 is “Y”) or when it is a time-reduced final variation (result of A5716 is “Y”). Probability) is prepared as an effect command (A5717), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5718). Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (A5719), and the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (A5720). After that, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is in a small hit state (A5721). Special Figure 2 When the variable display game is in a small hit state (the result of A5721 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A5724.

When the game control device 100 is not in the small hit state of the special figure 2 variation display game (the result of A5721 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the left-handed instruction in the test signal output data area (A5722). Subsequently, in order to turn off the second game status display unit 56 (lamps D8-D10) for notifying that it is a right-handed hit, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game status display number 2 area (A5723). , Clear the special figure 1 changing in the special figure status area (information subtraction) (A5724). After that, since the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of order, "0" is set as the processing number of the special figure 1 normal processing in order to shift to the special figure 1 normal processing, and the special figure 1 game processing number area is set. Save the processing number (A5725). Then, the process of displaying the special figure 1 is terminated.

[Processing during display of special figure 2]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 display process (A3314) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. 38A and 38B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the process during display of the special figure 2. FIG. 38A shows the first half portion of the processing during display of the special figure 2, and FIG. 38B shows the latter half portion of the processing during the display of the special figure 2.

First, the game control device 100 loads the small hit flag 2 (indicating small hit information or missed information) from the small hit flag 2 area (A5801), and clears the small hit flag 2 area (A5802). Subsequently, the jackpot flag 2 (indicating the jackpot information or the missed information) is loaded from the jackpot flag 2 area (A5803), and the jackpot flag 2 area is cleared (A5804). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit based on the big hit flag 2 (A5805).

When the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit (the result of A5805 is “Y”), the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the start of the special figure 2 big hit in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5806). ). For example, the signal relating to the start of the special figure 2 big hit is the on-data of the condition device operating signal and the on-data of the special symbol 2 hit signal.

Next, the game control device 100 loads the hit symbol command from the hit symbol command area, prepares it as an effect command (A5807), and executes the effect command setting process (A5808). Since the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, this hit symbol command corresponds to the big hit symbol. Subsequently, a jackpot fanfare command is prepared as an effect command (A5809), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5810).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the signal corresponding to the large winning opening opening information and the probability state in the external information output data area (A5811). The signal here includes on-data of 2 jackpot signals and on-data of 3 jackpot signals. In this embodiment, it does not matter because the 2R jackpot does not exist, but the jackpot 2 signal may be turned off by the 2R probability variation jackpot in the low probability, and the jackpot 3 signal may be turned off by the 2R probability variation jackpot in the high probability. You may.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets the jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the jackpot opening information (A5812), and saves the jackpot fanfare time in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A5813). Then, “3” is set as the processing number in order to shift to the fanfare / interval processing (A5814).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A5815), executes the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (A5816), and ends the special drawing 2 display processing. .. The fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing is the same as that executed in the processing during display in Special Figure 1.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is not a big hit (the result of A5805 is “N”), the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a small hit based on the small hit flag 2. It is determined whether or not (whether or not the small hit flag 2 is a small hit) (A5817). When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit (the result of A5817 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game executed this time has a high probability final fluctuation (A5818). If it is not a high-probability final variation (the result of A5818 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game executed this time is a time-reduced final variation (A5819). When the time reduction is not the final variation (the result of A5819 is “N”), the process of steps A5820 to A5823 is not performed, and the process proceeds to the process of step A5824.

The game control device 100 determines that the special figure 2 variation display game executed this time has a high probability final variation (the result of A5818 is “Y”) or the time reduction final variation (the result of A5819 is “Y”). ”), A probability information command (low probability) indicating a low probability is prepared as an effect command (A5822), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5821).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the probability information command (low probability) in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery of the RWM (A5822), and clears the left-handed instruction notification flag (A5823). After that, the hit symbol command is loaded from the hit symbol command area, prepared as an effect command (A5824), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5825). Since the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit, this hit symbol command corresponds to the small hit symbol.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a small hit fanfare command as an effect command (A5826), and executes an effect command setting process (A5827). Then, the signal related to the right-handed instruction (on-data of the launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5828), and the second game state display unit 56 (lamp D8-) that notifies that the right-handed time is being hit. In order to light D10), the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5829).

Next, in the game control device 100, since the lower prize opening is opened by a small hit in the present embodiment, the lower prize opening illegal winning number area is cleared (A5830), and the lower large winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area is cleared. The fraud monitoring period out-of-period flag is saved (A5831), the special figure 2 small hit fanfare process transition setting process is executed (A5832), and the special figure 2 display process is terminated. Although the big winning opening is opened by a small hit, the screen of the display device 41 does not have to be changed.

In the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process, the process for shifting to the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle process is executed. Specifically, "7" is set as the processing number in order to shift to the processing during the small hit fanfare, and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area. Further, the small hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area, and the signal related to the start of the small hit (on-data of one big hit signal) is saved in the external information output data area. Further, the signal relating to the start of the special figure 2 small hit (on-data of the special symbol 2 small hit signal) is saved in the test signal output data area, and the small hit middle information is saved in the special figure status area.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is not a small hit (when the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit) (the result of A5817 is "N"), that is, the special figure 2 variation display game. If the result of the above is out of order, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game executed this time has a high probability final variation (A5833). If it is not a high-probability final variation (the result of A5833 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game executed this time is a time-reduced final variation (A5834). If the time reduction is not the final variation (the result of A5834 is “N”), the process of steps A5835 to A5839 is not performed, and the process proceeds to step A5840.

The game control device 100 has a high probability final variation (the result of A5833 is "Y") or a time-reduced final variation (the result of A5834 is "Y"), and the probability information command (low probability). Is prepared as an effect command (A5835), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5836). Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (A5837), and the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (A5838).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 displays the number in the left-handed state in the game state display number 2 area in order to turn off the second game state display unit 56 (lamps D8-D10) for notifying that the game is right-handed. Is saved (A5839), and the special figure 2 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (A5840). After that, since the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of order, "0" is set as the processing number of the special figure 2 normal processing in order to shift to the special figure 2 normal processing, and the special figure 1 game processing number area is set. Save the processing number (A5841). Then, the process of displaying the special figure 2 is terminated.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing (A3213, A3315) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described. 39A and 39B are flowcharts showing the procedure of fanfare / interval processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the remaining ball counter for counting the remaining balls of the special variation winning devices 38 and 39 is 0 (A6001). When the remaining ball counter is not 0 (the result of A6001 is "N"), the fanfare / interval processing is terminated. When the remaining ball counter is 0 (the result of A6001 is "Y"). It is determined whether or not it is the first big hit round (A6002). If it is not the first jackpot round (the result of A6002 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A6010.

When the game control device 100 is the first big hit round (the result of A6002 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the game ball has passed at the normal drawing start gate 34 (A6003). When the game ball does not pass through the normal drawing start gate 34 (the result of A6003 is "N"), the fanfare / interval processing is terminated. That is, until the right-handed hit is started and the game ball passes through the normal drawing start gate 34, the process does not shift to the process related to the big hit (such as the process during opening of the big winning opening).

The game control device 100 sets information regarding the start of a jackpot when a game ball passes through the normal drawing start gate 34 (the result of A6003 is "Y"), that is, when right-handed hitting is started. Execute (A6004-A6009). First, the round number upper limit value table is set (A6004), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information in the round number upper limit value information area is acquired from the round number upper limit value table, and the round number upper limit value area of RWM is obtained. Save to (A6005). In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of rounds is 10R and 4R.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 acquires a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information in the round number upper limit value information area from the round number upper limit value table, and saves the round LED pointer in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (A6006). Then, in this embodiment, since the upper prize opening is opened by a big hit, the upper prize winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (A6007), and the fraud monitoring period outside flag is set in the RWM upper prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area. Is saved (A6008), and the on-output data of the signal during operation of the accessory continuous actuator is saved in the test signal output data area (A6009).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the number of rounds in the round number region by +1 (A6010). Since the number of rounds in the number of rounds area is cleared to 0 in the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing, it is 0 before the start of the big hit operation this time. After that, the large winning opening opening information and the round command corresponding to the number of rounds are prepared as the effect command (A6011), and the effect command setting process is executed (A6012).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the initial value of the jackpot processing control pointer corresponding to the jackpot opening information and the number of rounds (A6013), and saves the game in the jackpot processing control pointer area of the RWM (A6014). Here, in the case of a pattern in which the opening and closing of the big winning opening is repeated during one round, 0 is set as the initial value, and in the case of the pattern in which the big winning opening is opened only once in one round, the upper limit is suddenly set as the initial value. Set the value (= 21). In the case of a pattern in which opening and closing is repeated, the initial value does not have to be 0, but a value larger than 0 and less than the upper limit value may be used (that is, starting from an intermediate value). Next, the large winning opening opening information and the large winning opening opening time corresponding to the number of rounds are set (A6015).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is a lever solenoid operation round that operates the lever solenoid 86b that opens the specific area 86 (V winning opening) (A6016). In the present embodiment, the lever solenoid operation round is the jackpot round 1 (the first jackpot round).

The game control device 100 sets the operation data of the lever solenoid 86b (A6017) when the lever solenoid operation round is set (the result of A6016 is “Y”). Here, the lever solenoid opens the specific area 86 in a long time in the case of a probabilistic jackpot (10R or 4R probabilistic jackpot) and in a short time (very short time) in the case of a normal jackpot (10R normal jackpot). Set the operation data of 86b. Specifically, the data is set in the lever solenoid control pointer area, and the lever solenoid control timer is cleared to 0. On the other hand, when it is not the lever solenoid operation round (the result of A6016 is "N"), the stop data of the lever solenoid is set (A6018).

Next, the game control device 100 sets "4" as the processing number in order to shift to the processing during the opening of the big winning opening (A6019), and determines whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure 1 variable display game (A6019). A6020). If it is a big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A6020 is "Y"), this processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A6021), and the big winning opening opening time is set to the special figure 1 game processing. Save to the timer area (A6022). If it is not a big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A6020 is "N"), this processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6023), and the big winning opening opening time is set to the special figure 2 game processing timer. Save to the area (A6024).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start of opening of the upper prize opening (on-data of the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1) in the test signal output data area (A6025), and outputs the solenoid of the special winning opening of the RWM. Turn on the upper prize opening solenoid 39b (large winning opening solenoid 2) in the data area Save the upper prize opening on data (A6026), clear the number of big winning openings count (A6027), and process during fanfare / interval. To finish.

In this embodiment, only the big hit that opens only the upper big winning opening exists, but two types of the big hit that opens only the upper big winning opening and the big hit that opens only the lower big winning opening may be provided. It is also possible to provide a jackpot that opens both the upper and lower prize openings.

[Special figure 1 jackpot end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 big hit end process (A3216) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit end processing.

First, the game control device 100 executes a subroutine call based on the time reduction determination data (A6101). When the time reduction determination data is data without time reduction, the jackpot end setting process 1 is executed in order to shift to the normal gaming state after the end of the jackpot (A6102), and when the time reduction determination data is data with time reduction, the jackpot is hit. The jackpot end setting process 2 is executed in order to shift to the time saving state after the end (A6103).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is specific area passage information indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 86 (V winning opening) (A6104). As described above, in the jackpot round 1 (first jackpot round) in the case of the probability variation jackpot (10R or 4R probability variation jackpot), the specific area 86 is opened for a long time (A6017), and the specific area switch 72 is set to the specific area. The passage of the game ball to 86 (V prize) is almost certainly detected (regular passage in a specific area). Then, the game control device 100 can store the specific area passage information indicating that the game ball has passed to the specific area 86 (V winning) when there is a detection signal of the specific area switch 72 in the RAM. be.

Even in the jackpot round 1 in the case of a normal jackpot (10R normal jackpot), the specific area 86 is opened only for a very short time, but the specific area switch 72 is an accidental game ball to the specific area 86 (V winning opening). It may be possible to detect passage (V prize) (irregular passage in a specific area). Also in this case, the game control device 100 can store the specific area passage information in the RAM.

When there is no specific area passage information (the result of A6104 is "N"), the game control device 100 shifts to the process of step A6106. On the other hand, when there is information passing through a specific area (the result of A6104 is "Y"), the jackpot end setting process 3 is executed (A6105) in order to shift to the probability change state (probability fluctuation state) after the jackpot ends. In this case, the data set in the jackpot end setting process 3 is overwritten with the data set in the jackpot end setting processes 1 and 2, and the data set in the jackpot end setting processes 1 and 2 is invalidated. Become.

Next, the game control device 100 loads the probability information command from the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (A6106). In the jackpot end setting process 1-3, a probability information command indicating the presence or absence of a low-probability or high-probability probability state or a time-saving state is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery.

After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there has been an irregular passage in the specific region (A6107). As described above, the specific area irregular passage (specific area abnormal passage) means that the game ball passes through the specific area 86 in the case of a normal big hit, and the specific area regular passage (specific area normal passage) means. In the case of a probabilistic jackpot, the game ball passes through the specific area 86. For example, if the specific area passage information is generated in the case of a normal big hit, it can be determined that the specific area irregular passage has occurred. It should be noted that not only the regular passage in the specific region but also the irregular passage in the specific region shifts to the probable change state (probability fluctuation state) after the end of the big hit.

When the game control device 100 has an irregular passage in a specific area (the result of A6107 is "Y"), the game control device 100 includes the loaded probability information command with irregular probability variation information added (A6108), and this probability information. The effect command setting process is executed so that the command is set as the effect command (A6109). On the other hand, when there is no irregular passage in the specific area (the result of A6107 is "N"), the effect command setting process is executed so that the loaded probability information command is set as the effect command as it is (A6109).

Next, the game control device 100 sets "0" as the processing number in order to return to the special figure 1 normal processing (A6110), and saves the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A6111). Then, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (A6112). The signals relating to the end of the jackpot here are off-data of one jackpot signal and off-data of three jackpot signals.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (A6113). The signals related to the end of the jackpot here are, for example, off-data of the signal during operation of the condition device, off-data of the signal during operation of the continuous accessory operation device, off-data of the signal per special symbol 1, and off-data of the signal per special symbol 2. Is.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the turn-off number in the round LED pointer area (A6114). Subsequently, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraud monitoring period flag area of the upper prize-winning opening (A6115), and the special figure status area is cleared (A6116). After that, the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A6117), and the special figure 1 big hit end processing is terminated.

This special figure 2 game wait time value determines the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that has been forcibly terminated (special figure 2 normal processing during special figure 2 game processing), and is used for the next timer interrupt processing (FIG. 7). It is set to sometimes delay. Here, the special figure 2 game wait time value is 8 msec (that is, 2 as a value saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area), which is twice the interrupt cycle.

Assuming that the special figure 2 game wait time value is not set, the special figure 2 game process (A1313 in FIG. 7) performed immediately after the current special figure 1 game process (A1313 in FIG. 7) in which the special figure 1 big hit end process is executed ( In A1314) of FIG. 7, since the determination of the variation start of the special figure 2 variation display game starts (starts within the timer interrupt process of this time), the special figure 2 variation display game is started from the special figure 1 variation display game. It may be a problem because it starts first. Since the special figure 1 game processing timer is not set in the special figure 1 big hit end processing, it remains 0. Therefore, the determination of the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 variation display game is performed in the next timer interrupt process (special figure 1 normal process during the special figure 1 game process).

The special figure 2 game wait time value is set to twice the interrupt cycle (8 msec), but the special figure 2 game process immediately after the special figure 1 game process (starts in the current timer interrupt process). ), The special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (decrease of 4 msec). In the special figure 2 game processing in the next timer interrupt processing, the special figure 2 game processing timer is further updated by -1 (decrease of 4 msec) to 0 (the result of A3305 is "Y"), and the special figure 2 variable display game. (Special figure 2 during game processing, special figure 2 normal processing) is performed. As a result, in the next timer interrupt process after the end of the jackpot state by the special figure 1 variable display game, the determination of the variable start of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game (special figure 1 game processing and special figure). 2) If the game process) is performed and the start condition (start condition) is satisfied, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can start changing at the same time. As described above, while the special figure 1 variable display game is in the big hit state, the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped with a missed symbol (whether it is forcibly terminated or originally not changed).

If there is no particular problem in game control even if the special figure 2 variable display game is started before the special figure 1 variable display game after the end of the big hit state, the process of step A6717 is omitted. FIG. 2 It is not necessary to set the game wait time value.

[Special figure 2 big hit end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 big hit end process (A3318) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 big hit end processing.

The steps A6201 to A6216 of the special figure 2 big hit end process replace "special figure 1" in the special figure 1 big hit end process steps A6101 to A6116 with "special figure 2", respectively, and the special figure 1 big hit end process. Since the same processing as in the processing steps A6101 to A6116 is performed, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

It is not necessary to provide the special figure 1 game wait time value in the special figure 2 big hit end process. Since the special figure 1 game processing timer and the special figure 2 game processing timer are not set, they remain 0, and in the next timer interrupt processing, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game start to change. If the determination (inside the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process) is performed and the start condition (start condition) is satisfied, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game start to change at the same time. Because it can be done.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
Next, the details of the big hit end setting process 1 (A6102, A6202) in the special figures 1 and 2 big hit end process will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 1.

First, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the start of no time reduction state (no time reduction) in the external information output data area (A6301). Here, the signal relating to the start without the time saving state is off-data of two jackpot signals. The signal relating to the start without the time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (A6302). Here, the signals related to the start without the time saving state are the off-data of the special symbol 1 high-probability state signal, the off-data of the special symbol 2 high-probability state signal, the off-data of the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and the special symbol 2 variation. It is the off data of the time shortening state signal, the off data of the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal, and the off data of the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the number without the time reduction state in the game state display number area (A6303), saves the normal time reduction flag in the normal figure game mode flag area (A6304), and saves the special figure game. Save the special figure low probability & no time reduction flag in the mode flag area (A6305). The flag for no time reduction in the normal map indicates that the game is not in the time reduction fluctuation state (time reduction state, normal power support state) of the normal map fluctuation display game. The special figure low probability & no time reduction flag indicates that the probability of a big hit is low and it is not in the time reduction state (conducting support state).

After that, the game control device 100 clears the time reduction fluctuation frequency region to 0 (A6306), and saves a signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, off-data of the launch position designation signal 1) in the test signal output data region (A6307). .. Then, in order to turn off the right-handed display LED (first game state display unit 57), the left-handed number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A6308), and the power failure recovery transmission command area is used. The probability information command (low probability) indicating a low probability is saved (A6309), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is terminated.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
Next, the details of the big hit end setting process 2 (A6103, A6203) in the special figures 1 and 2 big hit end process will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 2.

First, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start of the time reduction in the external information output data area (A6501). Here, the signal relating to the start of the time reduction is on-data of two jackpot signals. The on-data of the big hit 2 signals is saved in the external information output data area at the start of the big hit fanfare (A5709, A5811), and the on-data of the big hit 2 signals continues from the big hit to the external information terminal 71. As a result, it will be output to an external device (such as a hall computer).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the start of the time reduction state (time reduction) in the test signal output data area (A6502). Here, the signals related to the start with the time saving state are the off-data of the special symbol 1 high-probability state signal, the off-data of the special symbol 2 high-probability state signal, the on-data of the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation. The on-data of the time shortening state signal, the on-data of the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal, and the on-data of the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the number with the time reduction state in the game state display number area (A6503), saves the normal time reduction flag in the normal figure game mode flag area (A6504), and saves the special figure game. Save the special figure low probability & time saving flag in the mode flag area (A6505). The normal map time reduction flag indicates that the game is in the time reduction fluctuation state (time reduction state, normal power support state) of the normal map fluctuation display game. The special figure low probability & time reduction flag indicates that the probability of a big hit is low probability and the time reduction state (normal electric support state).

Next, the game control device 100 saves an initial value (for example, 100) in the time reduction fluctuation number area for storing the time reduction fluctuation number (A6506), and the probability of indicating that the time reduction state is in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery. The information command (time reduction) is saved (A6507), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is terminated.

Since the right-handed state is advantageous from the big-hit state, the right-handed setting is not performed in the big-hit end setting process 2.

[Big hit end setting process 3]
Next, the details of the big hit end setting process 3 (A6105, A6205) in the special figures 1 and 2 big hit end process will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 3.

First, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start of the time reduction in the external information output data area (A6801). Here, the signal relating to the start of the time reduction is on-data of two jackpot signals. The on-data of the big hit 2 signals is saved in the external information output data area at the start of the big hit fanfare (A5709, A5811), and the on-data of the big hit 2 signals continues from the big hit to the external information terminal 71. As a result, it will be output to an external device (such as a hall computer).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the start with high probability and time saving in the test signal output data area (A6802). Here, the signals related to the start with high probability & time reduction are the on-data of the special symbol 1 high-probability state signal, the on-data of the special symbol 2 high-probability state signal, the on-data of the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and the special symbol. 2 It is on-data of the fluctuation time shortening state signal.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the number with the time saving state in the game state display number area (A6803), and saves the special figure high probability & time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A6804). The special figure high probability & time saving flag indicates that the probability of the big hit is high probability and the time saving state (here, the time shortening fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is executed).

After that, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the right-handed instruction (for example, on-data of the launch position designation signal 1) in the test signal output data area (A6805). Then, in order to light the right-handed display LED (first game state display unit 57), the right-handed number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A6806), and the power failure recovery transmission command area is used. The probability information command (high probability) indicating a high probability is saved (A6807), and the jackpot end setting process 3 is terminated.

[Small hit fanfare processing]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare middle processing (A3319) in the special figure 2 game processing will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the procedure of processing during small hit fanfare.

First, the game control device 100 prepares a small hit opening command for opening the lower prize opening as an effect command (A6901), and executes an effect command setting process (A6902). Next, "8" is set as the processing number (A6903), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6904), and the small hit opening time (for example, 1600 msec) is set as the opening time of the lower prize winning opening. Special figure 2 Save in the game processing timer area (A6905).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start of the small hit operation (on-data of the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 2) in the test signal output data area (A6906), and saves the signal in the large winning opening solenoid output data area. Save the lower prize winning opening on-data (A6907). As a result, the lower large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is opened in the small hit of the special figure 2 variable display game.

Next, the game control device 100 clears the large winning opening count area for storing the count number (number of detections) of the large winning opening count switch (lower large winning opening switch 38a and / or upper special winning opening switch 39a). Then (A6908), the processing during the small hit fanfare is completed.

In this embodiment, there is only a small hit opening pattern in which the large winning opening opens only once, but there may be a small hit opening pattern in which the opening and closing of the large winning opening is repeated. Further, by setting "8" as the processing number, it is possible to shift to the small hit medium processing after the small hit fanfare middle processing is completed.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 small hit end process (A3322) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 small hit end processing.

The game control device 100 sets “0” as the processing number in order to return to the normal processing in the special figure 2 (A7301), and saves the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A7302). Subsequently, the signal related to the end of the small hit (off data of the special symbol 2 small hit signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (A7303), and the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area. (A7304). Further, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (A7305), and the special figure status area is cleared (A7306).

Next, in the game control device 100, whether or not the probability of occurrence of a big hit is in a low probability state and there is no time reduction (state without normal electric support), that is, in the special figure low probability & no time reduction (normally). It is determined whether or not the player is in the gaming state (A7307). When it is not during the special figure low probability & no time reduction (during the normal gaming state) (the result of A7307 is "N"), the processing after step A7310 is executed.

The game control device 100 outputs a signal related to a left-handed instruction (off data of the launch position designation signal 1) when the special figure has a low probability and no time reduction (during a normal game state) (the result of A7307 is “Y”). It is saved in the test signal output data area (A7308), the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A7309), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted (A7309). A7310).

When the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted (the result of A7310 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares the decorative special figure 1 restart command as an effect command (A7311), and executes the effect command setting process. (A7312). The effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 1 restart command can execute the process of restarting the decoration special figure 1 variation display game. After that, the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (A7313), and the special figure 2 small hit end process is terminated. If the special figure 1 variable display game is not interrupted (the result of A7310 is "N"), the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (A7313) without preparing the decorative special figure 1 restart command, and the special figure 2 End the small hit end process

For the same reason as in the special figure 2 big hit end process (FIG. 41), it is not necessary to provide the game wait time value in the special figure 2 small hit end process.

[Control of production control device]
The control (process) executed by the effect control device 300 by the effect control program will be described below.

[Main processing (effect control device)]
First, the details of the main processing executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main process (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. The main process is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (directing microcomputer) when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 10. In the flowchart of the process executed by the effect control device 300, the code (number) of the step is represented as "B ***".

When the execution of the main process is started, the effect control device 300 first disables interrupts (B0001). Next, the initial settings of the CPU 311 and VDP 312 are executed (B0002, B0003), and interrupts are permitted (B0004). When the interrupt is permitted, the command reception interrupt process for receiving the command transmitted from the game control device 100 is ready to be executed.

Next, the effect control device 300 permits the generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like (B0005), and sets a random number seed to be used for random number generation (B0006). Then, the initial value at the time of turning on the power is saved in the area to be initialized (B0007).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 clears the WDT (watchdog timer) (B0008). The WDT is started with the CPU initial setting (B0002) described above, and monitors whether the CPU 311 is operating normally. If the WDT is not cleared even after a certain period of time, the WDT time is up and the CPU 311 is reset.

After that, the effect control device 300 executes an RTC reading process for reading time information from the RTC (real-time clock) 338 as a timekeeping means (B0009).

In the RTC reading process, the time information may be read from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every minute), and it is not necessary to read the time information every time the process shifts to step B0009. Further, the RTC reading process may be executed only once when the power is turned on to the effect control device 300 (that is, the power is turned on to the gaming machine 10) (the position of the RTC reading process may be changed, for example, step B0003). And B0004 may be executed). The effect control device 300 sets a time timer (time measuring means) for measuring the time in the timer area in the RAM, and when the time information is read from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle or when the power is turned on, the time is set from the RTC 338 only once. When the information is read, the time timer may be adjusted to match the time of RTC338. Then, the effect control device 300 may execute various processes by using the time timer instead of the RTC 338. By doing so, the number of processes for reading the time from the RTC 338 can be reduced, and the load on the CPU 311 is reduced.

In the RTC reading process, if the read time matches any of a plurality of predetermined times (first predetermined time, second predetermined time, ...), A predetermined effect may be executed, but a plurality of By drawing a lottery for the time interval of the predetermined time with a probability corresponding to the set value, the player can estimate the set value from this time interval. For example, the lottery may be performed so that the selection rate at long time intervals becomes smaller as the set value is larger. Further, the player can estimate the set value from the execution period of the predetermined effect by drawing a lottery for the execution period for executing the predetermined effect with a probability corresponding to the set value. For example, the lottery may be performed so that the selection rate for a long execution period becomes larger as the set value is larger.

Next, the effect control device 300 detects the operation signal of the effect button 25 by the player (the signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b), or changes the effect content (setting) according to the detected signal. The effect button input process is executed (B0010). Subsequently, a hall / player setting mode process for accepting operations such as changing the brightness and volume of the LED or liquid crystal by the person in charge of the game hall (game store) or the player is executed (B0011). In the hall / player setting mode processing, the player can customize the effect according to the effect points described later.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes an effect point control process for adding or clearing the effect points (B0012). In the effect point control process, the effect points are added by executing the effect or operation for which the effect points are to be added, and at the end of the game so that the effect points can be carried over to the next game. For example, information including information on production points is displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the effect control device 300 can display the QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in the hall / player setting mode processing. The player can estimate the set value from the added value by drawing a value (added value) to be added to the effect points with a probability according to the set value. For example, the lottery may be performed so that the selection rate of the large addition value increases as the set value increases.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes a random number update process for updating a random number such as an effect random number (B0013), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes the corresponding received command check process. (B0014). The details of the received command check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 48.

Next, the effect control device 300 updates various data according to the contents to be displayed on the display device (display means) such as the display device 41, or sets the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. The effect display editing process to be performed is executed (B0015). As for the drawing data set at this time, the image of the display device 41 can be updated without any problem as long as the VDP 312 can complete the drawing within the frame period of 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec). Then, the preparation for drawing in the display frame buffer is completed, and the drawing command preparation end setting is executed (B0016).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing (B0017). If it is not the frame switching timing (the result of B0017 is "N"), the process of B0017 is repeated until the frame switching timing is reached, and if it is the frame switching timing (the result of B0017 is "Y"), the display device 41 is displayed. Instruct screen drawing (B0018). Since the frame period of the present embodiment is 1/30 second, the frame is switched when the periodic V blank (image update) is executed twice, for example, every 1/60 second (1/2 of the frame period). .. The image may not be updated in 1/60 seconds, and the interval may be further increased.

Further, the effect control device 300 executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B0019).

Further, the effect control device 300 executes a decoration control process for controlling a decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) including LEDs and the like (B0020). In the decoration control process, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

Further, the effect control device 300 executes a movable body control process for controlling an effect device (board effect device 44, frame effect device) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B0021). In the movable body control process, for example, the accessory operation effect for driving the motor is set.

Then, when the effect control device 300 finishes the process of the above-mentioned B0021, the effect control device 300 returns to the process of B0008. After that, the processes from B0008 to B0021 are repeated.

[Receive command check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the details of the received command check process (B0014) in the above-mentioned main process (FIG. 47) will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the command reception number in order to check the command number received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of command receptions is 0 (B1102). When the number of commands received is 0, that is, when there is no command received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "N"), there is no command to analyze, so the received command check process ends.

On the other hand, when the number of commands received is not 0, that is, when the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 is a command reception counter in the command reception counter area. After subtracting the value by the number of received commands (B1103), the contents of the received command buffer of the RAM are copied to the command area for analysis (B1104). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem even if the number of command received is subtracted before copying the contents in the buffer to the command area. Also, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

Then, the effect control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (adds only 1) (B1105). The receive command buffer is configured to store up to 32 received commands. The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of the command read index 0 to 31, and here, the received commands are read in the order of the index and copied to the command area for analysis. When the copy to the command area for analysis is completed, the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the copy of the command for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106), and if the copy is not completed (the result of B1106 is "N". ”), The processing of steps B1104 to B1106 is repeated.

When the effect control device 300 receives the command transmitted from the game control device 100, the content of the received command is saved in the reception command buffer, and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the received command buffer, the received commands are analyzed separately in the command area for analysis. Then, when the content of the received command is copied to the command area for analysis, the received command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, by always securing a free area without performing analysis directly in the received command buffer, it is possible to prepare for a large amount of commands received.

Subsequently, when the copy is completed (the result of B1106 is “Y]), the effect control device 300 loads the received command content of the command area for analysis (B1107), and analyzes the content of the received command. The process is executed (B1108). The details of the received command analysis process will be described later in FIG. 49 below. Further, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109). After that, the process of step B1101. It is determined whether or not the analysis of the command for the number of received commands loaded in is completed (B1110), and if the analysis is not completed (the result of B1110 is "N"), the processes of steps B1107 to B1110 are performed. repeat. When the analysis is completed (the result of B1110 is "Y]), the received command check process is terminated.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the above-mentioned received command check process (FIG. 48) will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command analysis process executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 separates the upper byte of the received command as a MODE unit and the lower byte as an ACTION unit (ACT unit) (B1201). The command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is composed of a MODE unit (MODE command) and an ACTION unit (ACTION command), and is usually continuously transmitted from the MODE unit indicating the type of the command. To. Therefore, the upper and lower parts of the received command are configured in the order of the MODE part and the ACTION part.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit is in the normal range (B1202). That is, it is determined whether or not the value (value assigned as the command specification indicating the type) that can be taken by the MODE unit indicating the type of the command. Then, when the MODE unit is in the normal range (the result of B1202 is “Y”), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION unit is in the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not the value (value assigned as the command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION unit indicating the content of the command (specific effect instruction, etc.). Then, when the ACTION section is in the normal range (the result of B1203 is "Y"), the ACTION section for the MODE section determines whether or not the combination is correct (B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by the type of command specified by the MODE section. Then, if the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is "Y"), the command processing according to the command system is executed in the processing after B1205.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE unit is within the range of the variable command (B1205). The variable command is a command for instructing a variable pattern of a special decorative symbol, and is a variable command (set in the variable start information setting process). Then, when the MODE unit represents a variable command (the result of B1205 is "Y"), the variable command process is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a variable command (the result of B1205 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit is within the range of the hit command (B1207). The hit-type command is a command for instructing an operation (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) related to the effect during hitting. Interval command (set in process during interval opening), interval command (set in process during opening of big winning opening), ending command (set in processing during opening of big winning opening), small hit fanfare command, command during opening of small hit (small hit round command), Small hit end screen command (small hit ending command), etc. Then, when the MODE unit represents a hit-type command (the result of B1207 is "Y"), the hit-type command process is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a hit command (the result of B1207 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit is within the range of the symbol command (B1209). The symbol-based commands include a decorative special figure 1 command and a decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. Then, when the MODE unit represents a symbol-based command (the result of B1209 is "Y"), the symbol-based command process is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a symbol-based command (the result of B1209 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit is within the range of a single-shot command (B1211). Then, when the MODE unit represents a single-shot command (the result of B1211 is "Y"), the single-shot command process is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a single-shot command (the result of B1211 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit is within the range of the look-ahead symbol command (B1213). .. The look-ahead symbol command includes a look-ahead stop symbol command. Then, when the MODE unit represents a look-ahead symbol-based command (the result of B1213 is "Y"), the look-ahead symbol-based command processing is executed (B1214), and the reception command analysis processing is terminated. If the jackpot probability at the time of reception is in the low probability state, the look-ahead symbol command processing is executed using the look-ahead stop symbol command (low probability), and if the jackpot probability at the time of reception is in the high probability state, the look-ahead is executed. A look-ahead symbol-based command process may be executed using a stop symbol command (low probability).

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section is within the range of the look-ahead variable command when the MODE section does not represent the look-ahead symbol command (the result of B1213 is "N") (B1215). ). The look-ahead fluctuation command includes a look-ahead fluctuation pattern command. Then, when the MODE unit represents a look-ahead variable command (the result of B1215 is "Y"), the look-ahead variable command process is executed (B1216), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the MODE unit does not represent a look-ahead variable command (the result of B1215 is "N"), the effect control device 300 may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only in the test mode). Since there is a possibility, the received command analysis process is terminated. Further, when the MODE part is not in the normal range (the result of B1202 is "N"), the ACTION part is not in the normal range (the result of B1203 is "N"), or the ACTION part for the MODE part is not the correct combination ( The result of B1204 is "N"), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

[Single-shot command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the details of the one-shot command processing (B1212) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 49) will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a procedure of one-shot command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a model designation command indicating the type of the gaming machine (B1301). Then, when the MODE unit represents a model designation command (the result of B1301 is "Y"), the model setting process for setting the type of the gaming machine is executed (B1302), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents a RAM initialization command when the MODE section does not represent a model designation command (the result of B1301 is "N") (B1303). ). Then, when the MODE unit represents a RAM initialization command (the result of B1303 is "Y"), a RAM initialization setting process for notifying RAM initialization and the like is executed (B1304), and a single-shot command process is performed. finish.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents a power failure recovery command when the MODE section does not represent a RAM initialization command (the result of B1303 is “N”). ). Then, when the MODE unit represents a power failure recovery command (the result of B1305 is "Y"), the power failure recovery setting process is executed (B1306), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

If the MODE unit does not represent a power failure recovery command (the result of B1305 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a customer waiting demo command (B1307). .. Then, when the MODE unit represents the customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is "Y"), the customer waiting demo setting process is executed (B1308), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 1 hold number command when the MODE section does not represent the customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is "N"). (B1309). Then, when the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1309 is "Y"), the special figure 1 hold information setting process is executed (B1310), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

In the effect control device 300, if the MODE section does not represent the decorative special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1309 is "N"), then whether or not the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 2 hold number command. (B1311). Then, when the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 2 hold number command (the result of B1311 is "Y"), the special figure 2 hold information setting process is executed (B1312), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents the probability information command when the MODE section does not represent the decorative special figure 2 hold number command (the result of B1311 is “N”). (B1313). Then, when the MODE unit represents a probability information command (the result of B1313 is "Y"), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents an error / invalid command when the MODE section does not represent a probability information command (the result of B1313 is "N") (the result of B1313 is "N"). B1315). Note that there are, for example, an error occurrence command, an error release command, a state off command, and a state on command as error / invalid commands. As a status on command, a signal is generated from the glass frame opening detection switch 63 (glass frame opening error) and a signal is generated from the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main body frame opening detection switch) (main body frame opening error, front frame). There is a command indicating (open error). In addition, the status off command indicates that no error has occurred.

Then, when the MODE unit represents an error / invalid command (the result of B1315 is "Y"), an error / invalid setting process for notifying or canceling the error or invalidity is executed (B1316). Terminates single-shot command processing.

In the effect control device 300, when the MODE unit does not represent an error / invalid command (the result of B1315 is "N"), the MODE unit then issues a command for switching the effect mode (processing during special figure display). Etc.) is determined (B1317). Then, when the MODE unit represents a command for switching the effect mode (the result of B1317 is "Y"), the effect mode switching setting process is executed (B1318), and the single-shot command process is terminated. The effect mode is set in the effect mode switching setting process.

If the effect control device 300 does not represent a command for switching the effect mode (the result of B1317 is "N"), then the MODE section represents an out ball number command indicating the number of out balls. It is determined whether or not (B1319). Then, when the MODE unit represents the out-ball number command (the result of B1319 is "Y"), the out-ball number reception processing is executed (B1320), and the single-shot command processing is terminated.

In the effect control device 300, if the MODE unit does not represent the out-ball count command (the result of B1319 is "N"), then whether or not the MODE unit represents the count command (large winning opening count command). (B1321). Then, when the MODE unit represents the count command of the large winning opening switch (the result of B1321 is "Y"), the count information setting process is executed (B1322), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents a set value information command (probability set value information command) when the MODE section does not represent a count command (the result of B1321 is “N”). (B1323). The set value information command is included in the command at the time of power failure recovery in step A1046 of FIG. 6B and the command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1044. Then, when the MODE unit represents the set value information command (the result of B1323 is "Y"), the set value reception processing is executed (B1324), and the single-shot command processing is terminated. In the process of receiving the set value, the set value (probability set value) is stored in a storage unit such as a RAM, and necessary processing is executed.

When the MODE unit does not represent the setting value information command (the result of B1323 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents the setting change system command (B1325). As a setting change command, for example, there is a command (A1030) in which the probability setting is being changed. Then, when the MODE unit represents a setting change system command (the result of B1325 is "Y"), the setting change system information setting process is executed (B1326), and the single-shot system command process is terminated. In the setting change information setting process, the contents of the setting change command are stored and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command for which the probability setting is being changed is received, in the setting change information setting process, the setting changing display for notifying the player that the setting is being changed is displayed on the display device 41.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents a setting confirmation command when the MODE section does not represent a setting change command (the result of B1325 is “N”) (B1327). .. As a command for setting confirmation, for example, there is a command (A1033) for confirming probability setting. Then, when the MODE unit represents a setting confirmation system command (the result of B1327 is "Y"), the setting confirmation system information setting process is executed (B1328), and the single-shot system command process is terminated. In the setting confirmation information setting process, the contents of the setting confirmation command are stored and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when the command during the probability setting confirmation is received, in the setting confirmation system information setting process, the setting confirmation display for notifying the player that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the display device 41.

Next, it is determined whether or not the MODE unit represents a symbol stop command (B1329). The symbol stop command includes, for example, a symbol stop command of special figure 1 (decorative special figure 1 stop command) and a symbol stop command of special figure 2 (decorative special figure 2 stop command). Then, when the MODE section represents a command to stop the symbol (the result of B1329 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the command of the MODE section is a normal command (". B1330).

When the command of the MODE section is a normal command (the result of B1330 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 sets the stop mode of the corresponding special figure (B1331), and the game is played after all the symbols are stopped. The status flag is set to the normal status (B1332), and the single-shot command processing is terminated. In the process of B1332, as an example, the game state flag is set to the normal state, but depending on the timing when this process is executed, the game state flag is a flag of "changing", "big hit", and "small hit". Is set.

On the other hand, when the MODE section does not represent the command to stop the symbol (the result of B1329 is "N"), or when the command of the MODE section is not normal (the result of B1330 is "N"), the effect control device. 300 ends the one-shot command processing.

In addition, although not shown in FIG. 50, when the MODE unit represents the decorative special figure 1 interruption command (A5413) or the decorative special figure 1 restart command (A7311), the effect control device 300 is the decorative special figure 1. You may execute the process of interrupting or resuming the variable display game.

[Read-ahead design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the details of the look-ahead symbol system command process (B1214) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process (FIG. 49) will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a procedure of pre-reading symbol-based command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the latest hold information is the information of the special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 start storage), for example, the latest received decorative special figure hold number command is the decorative special figure 1 hold number. It is determined whether or not it is a command (B1601). When the latest hold information is the information of special figure 1 hold (the result of B1601 is "Y"), the look-ahead symbol system command (look-ahead stop symbol command) is set to the special figure 1 look-ahead symbol command area corresponding to the number of special figure 1 hold. Save (B1602).

In the effect control device 300, when the latest hold information is not the information of the special figure 1 hold (the result of B1601 is "N"), that is, the latest received decorative special figure hold number command is the decoration special figure 2 hold number command. In this case, the look-ahead symbol system command (look-ahead stop symbol command) is saved in the special figure 2 look-ahead symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number (B1603).

After steps B1602 and B1603, the effect control device 300 sets a look-ahead variable command reception wait flag indicating that the read-ahead variable command is waiting to be received (B1604). This is because the look-ahead symbol command and the look-ahead variable command are set, and the game control device 100 transmits the look-ahead variable command following the look-ahead symbol command. After that, the look-ahead symbol command processing is terminated.

[Read-ahead variable command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the details of the look-ahead variable command process (B1216) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process (FIG. 49) will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a procedure of pre-reading variation command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the look-ahead fluctuation system command is waiting to be received (B1701). When the above-mentioned look-ahead variable command reception wait flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that the read-ahead variable command is waiting to be received. If the read-ahead variable command is not waiting to be received (the result of B1701 is "N"), the look-ahead variable command processing is terminated. When the read-ahead variable command is waiting to be received (the result of B1701 is "Y"), the look-ahead variable command reception waiting flag is cleared (B1702).

Next, the effect control device 300 (sub-board) sets a look-ahead fluctuation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of holds of the latest hold information symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2) (B1703), and the look-ahead fluctuation system command is used. Acquires the sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command MODE unit corresponding to the MODE unit (B1704). Next, the look-ahead variation ACT conversion table is set (B1705), and the sub-internal look-ahead variation command ACT section corresponding to the look-ahead variation command ACTION section (ACT section) is acquired (B1706).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the converted MODE unit and the ACT unit (that is, the sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command MODE unit and the ACT unit) are both other than 0 (B1707). If the command is normal (valid), it is converted to a command other than 0. When both the converted MODE section and ACT section are other than 0 (the result of B1707 is "Y"), the converted command consisting of the converted MODE section and ACT section corresponds to the latest hold information and the number of holds. Save in the look-ahead fluctuation command area (special figure 1 look-ahead change command area or special figure 2 look-ahead change command area) (B1708). Then, the look-ahead command consistency check process is executed (B1709), and it is determined whether or not the combination of the MODE unit and the ACT unit after conversion is normal (B1710).

It should be noted that the time of the first half fluctuation corresponding to the MODE unit changes depending on the number of holds when the hold is changed and the display game is started. Holds vary When starting a display game, if there are no other holds, it will be a long first half change, and if a new hold occurs and the number of holds is large, it will be a short first half change. Therefore, even if the time value of the first half variation changes, the MODE section of the received look-ahead variation command is converted into the sub-internal look-ahead variation command MODE section so that the internal command of the effect control device 300 can be handled in the same way.

Further, since the type of reach is not related to the number of holds, the latter half change corresponding to the sub-pre-reading change command ACT section does not depend on the number of holds. However, since there are different types of reach for the same system, if the effect control device 300 is used as it is without converting the ACT section (value of the latter half fluctuation) of the look-ahead fluctuation system command, the number will increase and it will be difficult to check. .. For example, there are different types of normal reach, such as normal reach -1 stop off and normal reach +1 stop off. Therefore, by converting the ACT unit showing the reach of the same system into the same sub-pre-reading variation command ACT unit, the number is reduced and the burden of the check processing such as the pre-reading command consistency check processing is reduced.

Next, in the effect control device 300, when at least one of the converted MODE unit and the ACT unit (that is, the sub-inward look-ahead fluctuation command MODE unit and the ACT unit) is 0 (the result of B1707 is "N"), or If the combination of the MODE unit and the ACT unit after conversion is not normal (the result of B1710 is "N"), it is considered that the command after conversion is abnormal, and the look-ahead variable command processing is terminated.

When the combination of the MODE unit and the ACT unit after conversion is normal (the result of B1710 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 loads the hold information (latest hold information) to be read ahead from the look-ahead fluctuation command area. (B1711), the look-ahead lottery process regarding the latest hold look-ahead effect is executed (B1712). The look-ahead effect includes, for example, a continuous advance notice effect (including a chance look-ahead effect), a look-ahead zone effect, and a hold change advance notice. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the latest hold look-ahead effect (hold change notice, etc.) occurs (B1713). When the latest hold look-ahead effect occurs (the result of B1713 is "Y"), the point information corresponding to the selected look-ahead effect is set (B1714).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the pre-reading effect (holding change notice, etc.) that occurs is an effect that immediately starts (B1715). When the generated look-ahead effect is an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is "Y"), the display corresponding to the selected look-ahead effect is set (B1716). If the pre-reading effect that occurs is not an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is "N"), the display corresponding to the pre-reading effect at the time of hold shift (when the hold display is moved or the number of holds is reduced) is set and saved (B1717). ). Then, the look-ahead variable command processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 does not generate the latest hold look-ahead effect (the result of B1713 is "N"), or when the generated look-ahead effect is not an effect to start immediately (the result of B1715 is "N"). As it is. Ends the look-ahead variable command processing.

[Design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the details of the symbol-based command process (B1210) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process (FIG. 49) will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a procedure of symbol-based command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 sets a special symbol type corresponding to the MODE unit of the received symbol-based command (decorative special figure 1 command or decorative special figure 2 command) (B1801). The special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2. Then, the symbol type corresponding to the combination of the MODE unit and the ACTION unit (ACT unit) of the symbol system command is set and saved in a predetermined area such as RAM (B1802). Here, since the distribution ratio of the symbols changes between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the symbol type is set by using the table for each MODE. In this embodiment, the symbol type corresponds to the out-of-order symbol, the 10R probability variable jackpot symbol shown in FIG. 28, the 4R probability variable jackpot symbol, and the 10R normal jackpot symbol.

[Variable command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the details of the variable command processing (B1206) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 49) will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a procedure of variable command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the received variable system command (variable command) is undetermined (B1901). When the special figure type is undecided (the result of B1901 is "Y"), the variable command processing is terminated. If the special symbol type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is "N"), the combination of the received variable command and symbol command is checked (B1902), and whether the variable command and symbol type are inconsistent. Is determined (B1903). Here, the inconsistency is a contradiction in performing the production, such as when the symbol system command of the jackpot symbol is received even though the variable system command of the deviation is received. If the variable command and the symbol type are inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "Y"), the variable command processing is terminated.

When the effect control device 300 determines the variation pattern type from the variation command (variation command) when the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines the variation pattern type from the variation command (variation command) (B1904). A variable effect setting process for setting a certain variable effect is executed (B1905). It should be noted that there are multiple effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, the special figure changing is set in the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) (B1906), and if the number of pre-reading effects of the continuous notice effect (the remaining number of continuous notice effects) is not 0, the number is updated by -1. (B1907).

[Variable effect setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the details of the variation effect setting process (B1905) in the variation system command process (FIG. 54) described above will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the variation pattern type is reachless variation (variation that does not reach the reach state) (B2001). When the fluctuation pattern type is non-reach fluctuation (the result of B2001 is "Y"), the first half notice distribution corresponding to the number of production points, model code, special figure type, production mode, and set value (probability setting value) The group address table is set (B2002), and the address of the first half advance notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE part of the variable command (variable command) and the number of reservations of the special figure type is acquired (B2003). In the case of non-reach fluctuation, the fluctuation time is shortened as the number of holds increases, so the address of the table corresponding to the number of holds is acquired.

When the variation pattern type is not reachless variation (the result of B2001 is "N"), that is, the effect control device 300 is reachable variation, the effect control device 300 has a number of effect point points, a model code, a special figure type, and an effect mode. Set the first half advance notice distribution group address table corresponding to the symbol type and set value (probability set value) (B2004), and set the MODE part of the variable command (variable command) and the first half advance notice distribution group table corresponding to the variable pattern type. Get the address of (B2005).

After steps B2003 and B2005, the effect control device 300 draws a lottery for a notice that appears during the first half fluctuation (before reach) (B2006). The lottery probability of the notice depends on the set value. Next, set the second half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the number of production points, model code, special figure type, production mode, symbol type, and set value (probability setting value) (B2007), and set the variable command. The address of the second half notice distribution group table corresponding to the ACT unit is acquired (B2008), and the notice lottery that appears during the second half fluctuation (during reach) is performed (B2009). The lottery probability of the notice depends on the set value. After that, the content of the variable effect corresponding to the MODE section and the ACT section of the variable command (variable command) is determined (B2010). From the variable commands, you can see the variable time and the main reach contents.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the lottery result of the advance notice (B2011). Then, the content of the setting suggestion effect for suggesting the set value (probability set value, setting) is determined (B2012). After that, the stop symbol setting process for determining the stop symbol of the decorative special symbol variation display game is executed according to the content of the variation effect such as the reach effect or the advance notice effect (B2013). Here, the decoration stop symbol is concretely determined, such as determining the looseness in the case of the out-of-order symbol.

Next, the effect control device 300 sets the display of the setting suggestion effect (B2014). The display setting of the variable effect such as the reach effect is set (B2015), and the display setting of the advance notice effect is set (B2016). Subsequently, the display setting of the hold reduction (hold shift) corresponding to the special figure type is set. The corresponding display information (B1717) and the like are read out (B2017). Subsequently, a voice number that determines the effect mode (sound output mode) by the sound of the speaker and a decoration number that determines the effect mode by the light emission of the decoration device are set (B2018). The decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) has a plurality of decorative light emitting units (decorative LEDs, etc.) and emits light in a light emission mode (color, light emission timing, etc. of each LED) defined by a decoration number. ..

It is possible to set the voice number and the decoration number not only based on the effect content but also by drawing with a lottery probability according to the set value (probability setting value). In this way, the player can enjoy estimating the set value (probability set value) of the gaming machine 10 from the light emitting mode of the decorative device, that is, the light emitting mode of the decorative light emitting unit (LED).

Next, the effect control device 300 sets the display of the decorative special symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol type (B2019), and in addition to the first to third special symbols, the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol, identification information). Set the display of the fourth symbol variation regarding the above (B2020). The fourth symbol variation is displayed by the lamp display units 1 and 2 (LEDs) of the above-mentioned lamp display device 80 provided in addition to the display device 41, and / or by the display device 41.

[Hit command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the details of the hit system command process (B1208) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process (FIG. 49) will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a procedure of hit system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE unit of the received hit system command represents a fanfare (B2101). When the MODE part of the hit system command represents a fanfare (the result of B2101 is "Y"), that is, when the hit system command is a big hit fanfare command or a small hit fanfare command, the fanfare effect setting process for setting the fanfare effect. Is executed (B2102). The fanfare command includes information on the upper limit of the number of rounds for this big hit. Subsequently, fanfare is set in the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) of the current game machine 10 (B2103), and the hit-type command process is terminated. The upper limit of the number of rounds can also be obtained from the symbol type determined from the symbol command (decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern).

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section of the hit command represents a round when the MODE section of the received hit command does not represent a fanfare (the result of B2101 is "N") (the result of B2101 is "N"). B2104). When the MODE unit represents a round (the result of B2104 is "Y"), that is, when the hit system command is a round command or a small hit open command, the effect control device 300 executes the round effect setting process and is currently The game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) of the game machine 10 is set to during the round (B2105, B2106), and the hit system command processing is terminated.

If the MODE section of the received hit command does not represent a round (the result of B2104 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section of the hit command represents an interval (the result of B2104 is "N"). B2107). When the MODE unit represents an interval (the result of B2107 is "Y"), that is, when the hit system command is an interval command, the effect control device 300 executes the interval effect setting process, and the game of the current gaming machine 10 is executed. The game status flag indicating the status (P machine status) is set during the interval (B2108, B2109), and the hit system command processing is terminated. There is no interval command when the big winning opening is opened only once in a small hit, that is, when the small hit is one round.

If the MODE section of the received hit command does not represent the interval (the result of B2107 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section of the hit command represents the ending (the result of B2107 is "N"). B2110). When the MODE unit represents the ending (the result of B2110 is "Y"), that is, when the hit system command is the ending command or the small hit end screen command, the effect control device 300 sets the ending effect. The setting process is executed, the ending is set in the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) of the current game machine 10 (B2111, B2112), and the hit system command process is terminated.

If the MODE section of the received hit command does not represent the ending (the result of B2110 is "N"), the effect control device 300 ends the hit command process without executing any process. do.

Hereinafter, the setting suggestion effect according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 66.

[Time chart of setting suggestion effect]
FIG. 57 is a time chart of the setting suggestion effect performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, a case where the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times in a predetermined period in relation to the special figure variation display game will be described. As a specific example, when a game ball wins in the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, the special figure variable display game is started, and the first setting suggestion effect (setting notification) is performed before the normal reach (first reach) occurs. A case will be described in which the second setting suggestion effect is executed before the end of the special figure variation display game after the SP reach occurs (or does not have to occur) after the normal reach is performed. It should be noted that the plurality of times may be not only two times but also three times or more.

In the setting suggestion effect, for example, when displaying a variable display game on the display device 41 (FIG. 4), for example, character A, character B, and character C (characters having shapes, colors, and patterns that can be distinguished from each other) are displayed. It is an effect that can be displayed and the probability setting value currently set can be suggested by the number of displayed characters, and is generated with a predetermined probability (about 1/100 in the present embodiment). Further, the setting suggestion effect also occurs at a timing other than the variable display game (for example, when the ball out error is canceled).

The character A suggests, for example, a so-called odd number setting, and the currently set probability setting value is one of the odd number probability setting values (1, 3, 5) among the probability setting values (1 to 6). It suggests (notifies) that there is. The internal probability setting values 1 to 6 stored in the probability setting value area correspond to the settings 1 to 6, respectively.

Character B suggests, for example, an even-numbered setting, and the currently set probability setting value is one of the even-numbered probability setting values (2, 4, 6) among the probability setting values (1 to 6). It suggests (notifies) that there is.

Character C suggests, for example, that the currently set probability setting value is one of the high setting (probability setting value (5, 6)) among the probability setting values (1 to 6) (notification). It is something to do.

In the first setting suggestion effect, 1 to 3 characters A, B, and C are displayed respectively. In the second setting suggestion effect, 1 to 10 characters A, B, and C are displayed respectively, but 4 to 10 characters are easily selected. For example, the difference in the number of displayed characters A, B, and C is made more remarkable than in the first case, and which character is used to suggest the setting intended by the effect control device 300 (game control device 100). You may be able to judge.

[Reliability of setting suggestion effect]
FIG. 58 is a table showing an example of the reliability of the setting suggestion effect performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. FIG. 58 is merely an example and can be changed as appropriate.

In the setting suggestion effect, for example, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect by the character (character) can be set by the number of characters A, B, and C. By drawing the number of characters with the winning probability according to the setting, the reliability can be set according to the number of characters. When the lottery is performed by distributing to each number, the winning probability is the distribution rate (selection rate). If the lottery is done independently instead of sorting each number, duplicate winnings may be made (for example, 4 and 7), but in that case, one of the winnings is selected.

It should be noted that the setting suggestion effect may be performed only by the character having the maximum number of characters A, B, and C (the number of characters that does not have the maximum number is drawn and displayed regardless of the setting so as not to suggest the setting. do).

As described above, in the first setting suggestion effect, 1 to 3 characters A, B, and C are displayed, respectively. Therefore, when the number of each of the characters A to C is 1, 2, or 3, each is drawn with a winning probability according to the setting.

As described above, in the second setting suggestion effect, 1 to 10 characters A, B, and C are displayed respectively, so that the number of each of the characters A to C is 1, 2, 3, and so on. In the case of 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10, each is drawn with a winning probability according to the setting. Since it is easy to select 4 to 10 pieces, the winning probability of 4 to 10 pieces is significantly larger than the winning probability of 1 to 3 pieces (extremely, the winning probability of 1 to 3 pieces is set to zero). do).

As shown in FIG. 58, the reliability is set to increase by 10% each time the number of characters A, B, and C displayed increases by 1, and the reliability is set to 100% when 10 characters are displayed. can do. For example, one, two, and three characters C appear evenly in any setting, and the reliability of the setting suggestion of a high setting is low.

Further, the reliability shown in FIG. 58 can be multiplied by the ratio of the total number of displayed characters to the number of displayed characters with the largest number of displayed characters.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is performed a plurality of times during the variable display game. For example, the first and second settings are set so that the specific character increases, and the second setting is performed. In the suggestion effect, the reliability of the setting suggestion may be notified by the magnitude of the increase amount of a specific character (not the number of characters). For example, the setting suggestion by the character with the largest increase amount may be set as the setting suggestion effect intended by the effect control device 300 (game control device 100), and the reliability of the setting suggestion may be notified based on the magnitude of the increase amount. It is possible.

As described above, the setting of the setting suggestion effect is performed in step B2012 and step B2014 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 55).

[Expectation of big hit]
FIG. 59 is an example of a table showing the relationship between the setting suggestion effect and the jackpot performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 59 (A), in the present embodiment, the expectation of “big hit” is set high when the setting suggestion effect occurs, and low when the setting suggestion effect does not occur. FIG. 59 is merely an example and can be changed as appropriate.

When a "big hit" occurs, the rate at which the "big hit" occurs after the setting suggestion effect is 80%, and the rate at which the "big hit" occurs without the setting suggestion effect is 20%.

On the contrary, when "missing" occurs, the ratio of "missing" after the setting suggestion effect is 1%, and the ratio of "missing" without the setting suggestion effect is 99%.

As a result, when there is a setting suggestion effect, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that a "big hit" will occur after that, and even if there is no setting suggestion effect, the "big hit" will occur and the player will be able to do so. Can give a surprise to.

As shown in FIG. 59 (B), setting suggestion is performed by changing the first mode (for example, number, color) of the character appearing in the setting suggestion effect, and the big hit is performed in the second mode (for example, size) of the character. It is also possible to inform the degree of expectation. As described above, it is possible to perform the setting suggestion effect intended by the effect control device 300 (game control device 100) by the character having the largest number of displays among the characters A, B, and C. Further, when any one of the characters A, B, and C has a different color from the other characters, the setting suggestion intended by the effect control device 300 (game control device 100) by the character having the different color. It is also possible to produce.

When a "big hit" occurs, the ratio of the "big hit" occurring after the setting suggestion effect displayed by a large character is set to 50%, and the "big hit" is displayed after the setting suggestion effect displayed by a character smaller than the large character. The rate at which "" occurs is 30%, and the rate at which "big hit" occurs without setting suggestion effect is 20%.

On the contrary, when "missing" occurs, the ratio of "missing" occurring after the setting suggestion effect displayed by a large character is set to 1%, and after the setting suggestion effect displayed by a character smaller than the large character. The rate at which "missing" occurs is 1%, and the rate at which "missing" occurs without setting suggestion effect is 98%.

As a result, when there is a setting suggestion effect, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that a "big hit" will occur after that. It can be further enhanced, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

[Screen transition diagram]
FIG. 60 is a screen transition diagram of a setting suggestion effect performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. Here, a case will be described in which a setting suggestion effect is executed when the decorative special figure variable display game in which the variable display develops into the SP reach via the normal reach is executed. The setting suggestion effect is executed before the normal reach (first time) and when the SP reach (SP3 reach) occurs (second time).

FIG. 60 (A1) is a display screen when starting a decorative special figure variation display game. A variable display area 610 (left area 610A, middle area 610C, right area 610B) is arranged in the central portion of the display device 41, and the decorative stop symbols "6, 1, 2" are displayed in the variable display area 610. Further, a variable display area 615 is arranged in the lower right corner of the display device 41, and the stop symbols "6, 1, 2" are displayed in the variable display area 615. Further, the special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 and the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 in the upper right corner of the display screen of the display device 41 have a number "3" indicating the special figure 1 hold number and a special figure 2 hold, respectively. The number "0" indicating the number is displayed.

In the first hold display unit 630a that displays the first start memory as the first hold display, the hold display 633 (first hold display) moves to the right (hold shift), and the first hold is placed in the hold digestion area 640 of the rectangular frame. The hold display 633 at the right end of the display unit 630a moves. At present, the hold display 633 is not displayed on the second hold display unit 630b that displays the second start memory as the second hold display (second start memory display).

After that, in (A2), the variation (↓↓↓) of the decorative special symbol (large symbol) is being executed in the variation display area 610 as the identification information, and the variation (↓↓) of the decorative reduced symbol (small symbol) is executed as the identification information. ↓) is being executed in the variable display area 615. The left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are varied in the left region 610A, the right region 610B, and the middle region 610C of the variable display area 610, respectively. Further, the variable hold display 633a indicating the hold related to the running special figure change display game (starting memory that was the execution right of this special figure change display game) is displayed in the hold digestion area 640. Further, the special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 and the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 display a number "2" indicating the special figure 1 hold number and a number "0" indicating the special figure 2 hold number, respectively. ing.

At this time, as the first setting suggestion effect, a plurality of characters A (bear), character B (frog), and character C (tiger) are displayed on the display device 41. In (A2), two characters A, two characters B, and one character C are displayed, but at present, the reliability of the setting suggestion of character A is 20%, and the reliability of the setting suggestion of character B is 20%. Is 20%, and the reliability of the setting suggestion of the character C is 10%, and it is not so clear which character makes the setting suggestion intended by the effect control device 300 (game control device 100).

However, for the player who knows that the setting suggestion effect is performed multiple times, it can be predicted that the setting suggestion will be performed with high reliability in the next setting suggestion effect, so the setting suggestion is not clear in this way. Even if it is a setting suggestion effect, the player can pay attention to the effect and concentrate on the game.

The display position of each character is arbitrary, and may be displayed as a still image, or may be displayed as a moving image of each character's facial expression and display position.

Next, in (A3), the reach state (normal reach) is set, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the first setting suggestion effect ends. In (A3), the display of each character is erased, but the display may be continued as it is. At this time, the character display 755a "reach" is displayed below the variable display area 610.

After that, in (A4), the reach evolves from the normal reach state to the SP3 reach, the movie production (movie production) is executed in the center of the display screen, and the left and right symbols are in the upper corner of the screen. Moving. At this time, the display of the character display 755a "reach" may be erased.

Further, along with the transition to SP3 reach, the second setting suggestion effect is executed. Here, for example, characters A, B, and C are displayed around the movie effect (movie effect), and more than the first setting suggestion effect is displayed. In (A4), three characters A, four characters B, and five characters C are displayed. Here, an example in which setting suggestion is performed based on the number of characters C having the largest number of displays (5) is shown, and the reliability of the setting suggestion of character C (probability setting value is either 5 or 6) is 50%. Can be displayed (set) as.

Further, the reliability of the setting suggestion of the character C is determined by the ratio of the number of characters C having the largest number of displays (5) to the total number of characters displayed (3 + 4 + 5 = 12) (5/12) × 50% = 20. It can also be displayed (set) as 8%. At this time, in order to notify that the reliability of the setting suggestion by the character C is higher, a lottery may be performed so that the number of characters A or B displayed is smaller than that of the first time in the second setting suggestion effect. ..

Further, one character C is displayed at the first time, five characters are displayed at the second time, and the number of displayed characters is increased by four. Therefore, for example, the increase in reliability per character can be set to 10%, and the reliability of the second setting suggestion of character C can be set to 4 × 10% of the increase amount (regardless of the number of characters).

After that, in (A5), the special figure variation display game ends and the setting suggestion effect ends, the jackpot decoration stop symbol "3, 3, 3" is displayed in the variation display area 610, and the jackpot stop symbol "3". , 3, 3 ”is displayed in the variable display area 615. In addition, the character display 755b "Big hit !!" is displayed below the decorative stop symbol. Further, at this time, the variable hold display 633a displayed in the hold digestion area 640 disappears, so that it can be confirmed that one hold has been completely digested.

Subsequently, in (A6), the big hit round game is started, the big hit state (special game state) is set, and the production of the big hit round is started. In addition, in the above setting suggestion effect (first and / or second time), by displaying the characters A, B, and C larger than in the case shown in FIG. 60, the expectation of the big hit is further higher. It may be notified (set).

[Time chart of setting suggestion effect (first modification)]
FIG. 61 is a time chart of a first modification of the setting suggestion effect performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the first modification, a pseudo-continuous effect consisting of a predetermined number of pseudo-variations (three times) is executed before the normal reach occurs, the first setting suggestion effect occurs during the second pseudo-variation, and the second time. The setting suggestion effect occurs during the third pseudo-variation. The pseudo-continuous effect and the predetermined number of pseudo-variations may be determined, for example, in step B2010 of the variation effect setting process (FIG. 55). It should be noted that the pseudo continuous effect is an effect in which the pseudo-variation for changing and temporarily stopping the decorative special symbol (identification information) is performed a predetermined number of times (predetermined step) from the start to the end of one variation display game.

Character A (red) (FIG. 62A) suggests a so-called odd number setting. For example, the currently set probability setting value is an odd number probability setting value (1,3) among the probability setting values (1 to 6). , 5) suggests that it is one of them.

Character B (blue) (FIG. 62A) suggests a so-called even number setting. For example, the currently set probability setting value is an even number of probability setting values (2, 4) among the probability setting values (1 to 6). , 6) suggests that it is one of them.

In character C (yellow) (FIG. 62A), for example, the currently set probability setting value is a high setting (any of the probability setting values (5, 6)) among the probability setting values (1 to 6). It suggests that there is.

In the first modification, a group effect is executed in which a character group is formed and displayed by a plurality of characters. In the character group, the total number of characters A (red) and B (blue) is made constant (or almost constant), and the reliability of the setting suggestion that the probability setting value is even or odd is notified depending on the ratio. .. In the character group, the reliability of the setting suggestion that the probability setting value is the high setting "5, 6" is further notified by the number of characters C (yellow). The characters A and B may have the same shape only by changing the color.

Since character A (red) and character B (blue) suggest odd-numbered settings and even-numbered settings, which are mutual exclusivity events, keep the total number constant and use the ratio of character A (red) and character B (blue). The reliability of the setting suggestion can be notified.

In the first setting suggestion effect, for example, the ratio of the number of characters A (red): character B (blue) is 7: 3, and in the second setting suggestion effect, character A (red): character B (blue). By setting the ratio of the number to 9: 1, it is possible to increase the reliability of the setting suggestion of the odd number setting in which the probability setting value is an odd number. For example, at a ratio of 7: 3, the reliability of odd-numbered settings is 70% (the reliability of even-numbered settings is 30%), and at a ratio of 9: 1, the reliability of odd-numbered settings is 90% (the reliability of even-numbered settings is 90%). It may be 10%).

Conversely, in the first setting suggestion effect, for example, the ratio of the number of characters A (red): character B (blue) is 3: 7, and in the second setting suggestion effect, character A (red): character B. By setting the ratio of the number of (blue) to 1: 9, it is possible to increase the reliability of the setting suggestion of the even setting in which the probability setting value is even. For example, at a ratio of 3: 7, the reliability of even-numbered settings is 70% (the reliability of odd-numbered settings is 30%), and at a ratio of 1: 9, the reliability of even-numbered settings is 90% (the reliability of odd-numbered settings is 90%). It may be 10%).

Furthermore, in the first setting suggestion effect, for example, the number of characters C (yellow) displayed is 5, and in the second setting suggestion effect, the number of characters C (yellow) displayed is increased to 7, so that the probability is high. It is also possible to increase the reliability of the setting suggestion that the setting value is a high setting.

In the first modification, for example, if character C (character A or character B may be used) is not displayed in the first setting suggestion effect, or if neither character A, character B, nor character C is displayed, a big hit is achieved. Expectations can be set as low. Further, when all the characters A, B, and C are displayed, it is possible to set it as having a high expectation of a big hit.

It is also possible to set the expectation of the jackpot to change based on the change in the displayed size and color of the characters A, B, and C. When the character performing the setting suggestion effect indicates that the expectation of the jackpot is high in this way, it may be performed together with the display mode change indicating that the expectation of the jackpot is high in the holding display 633a during the change of the holding digestion region 640. , The change in the display mode may be prohibited so that the player can pay attention to the setting suggestion effect.

[Screen transition diagram (first modification)]
FIG. 62A is a screen transition diagram (first half) of a first modification of the setting suggestion effect performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. FIG. 62B is a screen transition diagram (second half) of a first modification of the setting suggestion effect performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment.

FIG. 62A (B1) is the same as FIG. 60 (A1). (B2) of FIG. 62A is the same as (A2) of FIG. 60, but the variation display displayed in the variation display area 610 is the first pseudo variation of the pseudo continuous effect.

Then, in (B3), the first pseudo-variation (single effect) of the pseudo-continuous effect is completed, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and in the middle region 610C, the pseudo-continuous symbol suggesting the pseudo-continuous effect is displayed. Is stopped and displayed. In addition, the character display 752 "pseudo-two times" indicating the number of executions of the pseudo-variation to be started (the number of pseudo-reams) is displayed.

After that, in (B4), the second pseudo-variation starts and the first setting suggestion effect (group effect) is performed. For example, as shown in (B4), an image in which a meteor shower by character A (star-shaped ★), character B (star-shaped ☆), and character C (triangle Δ) flows from the right to the left of the screen flows for a predetermined time. Then, it is possible to notify that the expectation of a big hit is high by playing the video.

At this time, for example, the ratio of the display number of the character A (red) to the display number of the character B (blue) is 7: 3, and it is notified that the reliability of the setting suggestion of the odd number setting is slightly high. ing. Further, since the character C (yellow) is also displayed, the display of the character C (yellow) can suggest that the setting is high with a predetermined reliability (may be FIG. 58). While the first setting suggestion effect (group effect) is being performed, the character display 752 "pseudo-twice" may be displayed or deleted.

Next, in (B5), the first setting suggestion effect (group effect) ends. Further, also in (B5), the character display 752 "pseudo-twice" may remain displayed or may be erased. The second pseudo-variation continues in the variation display area 610.

Then, in (B6), the second pseudo-variation is completed and the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and in the middle region 610C, the pseudo-continuous symbol suggesting the pseudo continuous effect is stopped and displayed. At the same time, the character display 752 "pseudo 3 times" indicating the number of executions of the pseudo variation to be started (pseudo-ream number) is displayed.

After that, in (B7) of FIG. 62B, the third pseudo-variation (↓↓↓) of the variable decoration special symbol (large symbol) is executed in the variable display area 610 for a predetermined time.

After that, in (B8), the second setting suggestion effect (group effect) is performed. At this time, similarly to (B4), an image in which a meteor shower by characters A, B, and C flows from the right to the left of the screen flows for a predetermined time. However, this time, the ratio of the display number of the character A (red) to the display number of the character B (blue) is 9: 1, and the reliability suggesting that the setting is an odd number is further higher.

Further, since the number of characters C (yellow) displayed has also increased from 5 to 7, it is possible to notify that the reliability of the setting suggestion is increased by the increase (see FIG. 58). On the contrary, if the number of characters C (yellow) displayed does not increase or decreases in the second setting suggestion effect, it is notified that the reliability of the setting suggestion by displaying the character C (yellow) is not so high. You can also do it.

Next, in (B9), the reach state is reached, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the setting suggestion effect (group effect) ends. In this case, since the pseudo-continuous effect is completed, the pseudo-continuous symbol is not displayed in the middle region 610C. Further, the character display 755 "reach" is displayed below the variable display area 610.

After that, in (B10), the special figure variation display game ends, and the stop symbol "3, 1, 3" of "off" is displayed in the variation display area 610 and the variation display area 615. Further, at this time, the variable hold display 633a displayed in the hold digestion area 640 disappears, so that it can be confirmed that one hold has been completely digested.

[Time chart of setting suggestion effect (second modification)]
FIG. 63 is a time chart of a second modification of the setting suggestion effect performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the gaming machine 10, a character zone effect (for example, a notice effect using the entire display screen) may be performed with a predetermined probability based on a pending prize with a high expectation of a big hit, and this character zone effect may result in a big hit. It is possible to notify that the degree of expectation is high.

Therefore, in the second modification, the setting suggestion effect is performed with a predetermined probability when the character zone is entered, and it is notified that the expectation of the big hit is higher than the case where only the character zone occurs due to the appearance of the setting suggestion effect.

In addition, the character zone continues until the hold that triggered the entry into the character zone is exhausted, and during that time, a plurality of variable display games are played along with the hold digestion. At this time, the setting suggestion effect is performed every time the variable display game is started, and the reliability of the setting suggestion is increased each time.

As described above, in the second modification, the character zone effect is executed over a plurality of special figure variation display games as a look-ahead effect based on hold (look-ahead zone effect), and the look-ahead variation command processing (Fig.) It is set in 52). Not limited to this, the character zone effect occurs at a predetermined trigger (timing) such as when the expectation of a big hit of the special figure fluctuation display game being executed is high, and is executed over a plurality of fluctuation display games. Anything may be used, and it may be set by a variable effect setting process (FIG. 55) or the like.

In the second modification, when the first start memory (which may be the second start memory) already has three holds (hold 3, hold 2, hold 1), the hold (hold 0) with a high expectation of a big hit is Consider a case where a prize is won and the hold is consumed in the order of hold 3, hold 2, hold 1, hold 0.

Then, the first setting suggestion effect is performed when the hold 3 is digested, the second setting suggestion effect is performed when the hold 2 is digested, and the third setting suggestion effect is performed when the hold 1 is digested. At the time of digestion of hold 0, the setting suggestion effect is performed for the fourth time.

In the first setting suggestion effect, for example, three characters A that suggest setting an odd probability setting value are displayed, two characters B that suggest setting an even probability setting value are displayed, and a high probability setting value is displayed. Character C suggesting is not displayed (0 is displayed).

In the second setting suggestion effect, for example, three characters A that suggest setting an odd probability setting value are displayed, three characters B that suggest setting an even probability setting value are displayed, and a high probability setting value is displayed. One character C suggesting is displayed.

In the third setting suggestion effect, for example, three characters A that suggest setting an odd probability setting value are displayed, five characters B that suggest setting an even probability setting value are displayed, and a high probability setting value is displayed. Four characters C suggesting are displayed.

In the fourth setting suggestion effect, for example, three characters A that suggest setting an odd probability setting value are displayed, five characters B that suggest setting an even probability setting value are displayed, and a high probability setting value is displayed. Seven characters C suggesting are displayed.

In this way, the number of characters displayed by the effect control device 300 (game control device 100) to suggest the intended setting is increased as the number of special figure variation display games is repeated. In FIG. 63, since the number of displayed characters B increases and is larger than that of character A, the reliability of the setting suggestion that the probability setting value is even is higher than the reliability of the setting suggestion that the probability setting value is odd. It can be judged that it is expensive.

In addition, the number of characters C displayed increases as the number of special figure variation display games increases, such as 0, 1, 4, and 7, so the setting is higher depending on the display mode (increase amount) of character C. It is also possible to notify that the reliability of the setting suggestion is high.

On the contrary, if the number of characters C displayed does not increase or decreases even after the number of special figure fluctuation display games is repeated, the reliability of the setting suggestion that the setting is high depending on the display mode (decrease amount) of the character C is high. It is also possible to notify that it is low.

[Screen transition diagram (second modification)]
FIG. 64A is a screen transition diagram (first half) of a second modification of the setting suggestion effect performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. FIG. 64B is a screen transition diagram (second half) of a second modification of the setting suggestion effect performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment.

FIG. 64A (C1) is a display screen when the decorative special figure variation display game is started, and a stop symbol is displayed as in FIG. 60 (A1). The special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 and the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 display a number "4" indicating the special figure 1 hold number and a number "0" indicating the special figure 2 hold number, respectively. ..

In (C1), the hold display 633 (hold 3) moves to the right (hold shift) in the first hold display unit 630a that displays the first start memory as the first hold display, and at the same time, it moves to the hold digestion area 640 of the rectangular frame. The hold display 633 at the right end of the first hold display unit 630a moves.

Here, the hold display 633 (hold 0) displayed on the first hold display unit 630a is pre-determined as having a high expectation of a big hit at the time of winning and performing a setting suggestion effect. As a result, the hold display 633 (hold 0) notifies that the color and the like are changed to a different display mode from the other hold and the degree of expectation is high, but the display mode may be omitted.

After that, in (C2), the same variation display as in (A3) of FIG. 60 is performed, and the digestion of the hold 3 is started. At this time, the variable hold display 633a indicating the hold (hold 3) related to the special figure change display game being executed is displayed in the hold digestion area 640. At this time, the special figure 1 hold number displayed by the special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 is “3”.

Further, when the digestion of the hold 3 is started, the first setting suggestion effect is performed and the character zone is entered, and the background (color, pattern, etc.) displayed on the display device 41 changes.

In (C2), three characters A (bear) are displayed, two characters B (frogs) are displayed, and character C (tiger) is not displayed.

By the way, as described above, the hold display 633 (hold 0) is pre-determined as having a high expectation of a big hit at the time of winning and performing a setting suggestion effect. Therefore, it is possible to enter the character zone at the stage where the hold 0 is won (the stage before (C1)). However, by rushing into the character zone when the hold 3 is exhausted, the degree of attention to the hold 3 can be increased.

After that, in (C3), the first variable display game ends, and the stop symbol "3, 2, 9" of "off" is displayed in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615, and the variable display is on hold. With the disappearance of 633a, the hold 3 has been digested. At this time, the characters A and B move to positions that do not overlap with the stop symbols "3, 2, 9", or are erased, so that the first setting suggestion effect is also completed.

Next, in (C4), the same variation display as in (C2) is performed, and the digestion of the hold 2 is started. At this time, the variable hold display 633a indicating the hold (hold 2) related to the special figure change display game being executed is displayed in the hold digestion area 640. At this time, the special figure 1 hold number displayed by the special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 is “2”.

In addition, when starting the digestion of Hold 2, the second setting suggestion effect is performed, 3 characters A (bear) are displayed, 3 characters B (frog) are displayed, and character C (tiger) is displayed. One is displayed.

After that, in (C5), the second variation display game ends, and the stop symbol "5, 7, 8" of "off" is displayed in the variation display area 610 and the variation display area 615, and the variable display is on hold. With the disappearance of 633a, the hold 2 is already digested. At this time, the characters A, B, and C are moved to positions that do not overlap with the stop symbols "5, 7, 8", or are erased, so that the second setting suggestion effect is also completed.

Next, in (C6), the same variable display as in (C2) and (C4) is performed, and the digestion of Hold 1 is started. At this time, the variable hold display 633a indicating the hold (hold 1) related to the special figure change display game being executed is displayed in the hold digestion area 640. Further, the special figure 1 hold number displayed by the special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 is "1".

In addition, when starting the digestion of Hold 1, the third setting suggestion effect is performed, 3 characters A (bear) are displayed, 5 characters B (frog) are displayed, and character C (tiger) is displayed. Four are displayed.

After that, in (C7), the third variation display game ends, and the stop symbol "4, 2, 1" of "off" is displayed in the variation display area 610 and the variation display area 615, and the variable display is on hold. When 633a also disappears, the hold 1 is digested. At this time, the character A, the character B, and the character C move to a position where they do not overlap with the stop symbol "4, 2, 1", or are erased, so that the third setting suggestion effect is also completed.

Next, in (C8), the same fluctuation display as in (C2), (C4) and (C6) is performed, and the digestion of hold 0 is started. At this time, the variable hold display 633a indicating the hold (hold 0) related to the special figure change display game being executed is displayed in the hold digestion area 640. At this time, the special figure 1 hold number displayed by the special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 is “0”.

In addition, when starting the digestion of hold 0, the fourth setting suggestion effect is performed, 3 characters A (bear) are displayed, 5 characters B (frog) are displayed, and character C (tiger) is displayed. Seven are displayed.

After that, in (C9), the fourth variable display game ends, and the stop symbol "2, 6, 9" of "off" is displayed in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615, and the variable display is on hold. With the disappearance of 633a, Hold 1 has been exhausted, and the character zone ends. At this time, the character A, the character B, and the character C are deleted, so that the fourth setting suggestion effect is also completed.

[Other setting suggestion effects]
FIG. 65 is a diagram illustrating an example of another setting suggestion effect. As shown in FIG. 65, the setting suggestion effect may be executed on the display device 41 by the right-handed instruction display 620 of the hitting instruction display instead of the character. In this case, the higher the number of right-handed instruction displays 620, the higher the reliability of the high setting.

Further, the setting suggestion effect may be executed as long as the timing is such that the player can easily pay attention to the display device 41 even during the special figure variation display game. In the example of FIG. 65, when the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the special gaming state such as in the case of a big hit fanfare, the setting suggestion effect is executed by the right-handed instruction display 620. In this way, by executing the setting suggestion effect at a timing that is easy for the player to pay attention to, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion effect from being overlooked. In addition, at the time of a big hit fanfare, a display 621 "Aim at the gate !!" is also displayed, which suggests that a game ball should be launched at the normal drawing start gate 34 by right-handed hitting.

When a distribution gate for selecting the upper limit of the number of rounds of the big hit is provided in the game area 32 on the right side, the display 621 may indicate that the distribution gate is aimed at instead of the normal start gate 34. Since the big hit round does not start until the game ball passes through the distribution gate, it is possible to further prevent overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

FIG. 66 is a diagram illustrating another example of another setting suggestion effect. In the example of FIG. 66, the setting suggestion effect is executed when an error (here, a ball-out error) occurs in which the player cannot intentionally cause the game and the game must be interrupted. Even in this way, by executing the setting suggestion effect at a timing that is easy for the player to pay attention to, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion effect from being overlooked.

During the decorative special figure variation display game started in (D1) of FIG. 66, a ball out error occurs due to the detection of the shoot ball out switch signal as shown in (D2), and the error display 623 "ball out error" is displayed. Will be done. The character 625 is displayed together with the error display 623, and the reliability of the high setting is notified depending on the display mode (facial expression) of the character 625. After that, as in (D3), the character 625 is displayed together with the error release display 627 "error has been cleared" indicating that the error has been cleared, and similarly, depending on the display mode (expression) of the character 625. The reliability of the high setting is notified.

[Action / effect of the first embodiment]
According to the above, the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment includes an effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing an effect related to the variable display game that variablely displays the identification information, and the stop result of the variable display game. Is a setting changing means (setting key switch 93) capable of changing a setting value (probability setting value) according to a setting related to a game in a gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the special result is obtained. , RAM initialization switch 112), and the effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute the setting suggestion effect that suggests information (probability set value) regarding the set value a plurality of times in a predetermined period.

With the above configuration, the player is produced by performing the setting suggestion effect a plurality of times in a predetermined period (for example, a period of one variable display game or a period spanning a plurality of variable display games) in relation to the variable display game or the like. It is possible to focus on the game and enhance the interest of the game.

In the first embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute the setting suggestion effect a plurality of times in one variable display game.

With the above configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect and concentrate on the game by increasing the degree of attention to one variable display game in which the setting suggestion effect is performed a plurality of times.

In the first embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute the setting suggestion effect a plurality of times over a plurality of variable display games.

With the above configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect and concentrate on the game by performing the setting suggestion effect according to the timing of the effect performed over the plurality of variable display games such as the zone effect.

In the first embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) has such that the reliability of the suggestion of the setting suggestion effect executed later is higher than the reliability of the suggestion of the setting suggestion effect executed earlier. , Set multiple times setting suggestion effect.

With the above configuration, by providing a difference in the reliability of the setting suggestion depending on the timing, the player can enjoy waiting for the setting suggestion effect to appear at a specific timing while watching the effect. Therefore, by increasing the expectation for the setting suggestion effect that appears next, the player can pay attention to the effect and can concentrate on the game.

In the first embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can notify the degree of expectation that the stop result of the variable display game becomes a special result by making the setting suggestion effect appear, and the mode of the setting suggestion effect. The reliability of the suggestion of the setting suggestion effect is changed by the change of (such as increase in the number of characters).

With the above configuration, by associating the setting suggestion effect with the expectation of the special result (big hit), even a player who is playing the game without worrying about the probability setting value can pay attention to the effect, and the mode of the setting suggestion effect. By associating the change in the setting with the reliability of the setting suggestion, the player can pay attention to the production and can concentrate on the game.

In the first embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is used by displaying the same type of images (character A, character B, character C) on the display device 41 in a plurality of setting suggestion effects. The production modes of the setting suggestion effects of the times are related to each other.

With the above configuration, by displaying the same type of character multiple times in the setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion effect performed multiple times is related to each other, and by paying attention to it, the setting suggestion can be grasped. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the production and to concentrate on the game.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment includes an effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing an effect related to a variable display game that displays identification information in a variable manner, and the stop result of the variable display game is a special result. In the game machine 10 capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, the setting changing means (setting key switch 93, RAM initial) capable of changing the setting value (probability setting value) according to the setting related to the game. The effect control means (effect control device 300) is provided with a changeover switch 112), and can execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests information (probability set value) regarding the set value. It is characterized in that it is possible to notify the degree of expectation that the stop result of the game will be a special result.

With the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion effect from being overlooked by performing the setting suggestion effect associated with the expectation of the special result (big hit).

In the first embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute the setting suggestion effect by displaying the characters (character A, character B, character C) on the display device 41.

With the above configuration, the setting suggestion effect can be performed in a simple and easy-to-identify manner.

[Second Embodiment]
A second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 75. The configuration other than that described below may be the same as that of the first embodiment. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first embodiment, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted as appropriate. The second embodiment relates to the display probability setting value in the setting variable state (setting change mode) and the display method thereof.

[Work setting value, display probability setting value, effect control information]
FIG. 67 shows the work set value, the display probability setting value (setting examples 1, 2, 3, 4) and the effect control information (effect set value, effect set value) of the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment. It is a table which shows the correspondence. Normally, the game control device 100 holds six work set values "0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" (set values), and corresponds to the probability set values (information about the set values). Therefore, the information corresponding to the big hit probability (and the small hit probability)) "1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6" is provided. However, depending on the gaming machine 10, the jackpot probabilities (and small hit probabilities) corresponding to different probability setting values are the same, and the number of setting types of display probability setting values may be less than six. That is, in order to prevent confusion among the people involved in the hall, even if the probability setting values used or stored inside the gaming machine 10 are different, if the same big hit probability (and small hit probability) is used, the big hit probability (and small) Make the display probability setting value associated with (hit probability) the same. The same display probability setting value means the same big hit probability (and small hit probability).

In the setting example 1 of FIG. 67, 1-6 are set as display probability setting values with respect to the work setting values 0-5, and the display probability setting values are set to different values from each other. In the setting example 2, the case where all the display probability setting values corresponding to the six work setting values are set to "1" is shown. In setting example 3, the display probability setting values corresponding to the work setting values "0", "1", and "2" are set to "1", respectively, and the work setting values "3", "4", and "2" are set. It represents the case where the display probability setting value corresponding to "5" is set to "2". In setting example 4, the display probability setting values corresponding to the work setting values "0" and "1" are set to "1", respectively, and the display probabilities corresponding to the work setting values "2" and "3" are set. It represents a case where the set value is set to "2" and the display probability setting value corresponding to the work setting value "4" and "5" is set to "3" respectively.

In setting example 1, since the display probability setting value changes each time the RAM initialization switch 112 as the setting value change switch is pressed, the operator can operate the RAM initialization switch 112 by operating the gaming machine 10 (game control device 100). Can be identified as reacting.

On the other hand, in the setting example 2, since the display probability setting value is "1" regardless of the value of the work setting value, the display of the display probability setting value is "1" before and after pressing the RAM initialization switch 112. There is no change in "1", and it is not possible for the operator to identify whether or not the display of the performance display device 152 (display unit) is responding to the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112. Also in setting example 3, when changing the work setting value from "0" to "1", from "1" to "2", from "3" to "4", and from "4" to "5", respectively. It is not possible to identify whether or not the gaming machine 10 (game control device 100) is reacting to the operation. Further, also in the setting example 4, the game machine 10 (game control) is used for the operation when the work setting value is changed from "0" to "1", "2" to "3", and "4" to "5", respectively. It is not possible to identify whether or not the device 100) is reacting.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, every time the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed, that is, every time the work setting value is changed, the display of the display probability setting value is temporarily displayed before and after the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed. By displaying differently, it is possible to identify whether or not the game machine 10 (game control device 100) is reacting to the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112.

[Probability setting change / confirmation process]
FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing a procedure of probability setting change / confirmation processing of the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment. The procedure of the probability setting change / confirmation process of this embodiment is similar to that of the first embodiment, but before and after changing the work setting value (and the display probability setting value), intermediate data (intermediate) is used as the probability setting value display data. Information) is transmitted (displayed) to the performance display device 152.

As shown in FIG. 68, the work setting value in the work setting value area (in the RAM 111c or the register) is updated by +1 in the range of "0" to "5", and the probability setting value corresponds to the work setting value. After updating the probability setting values 1 to 6 in the area by +1 (A2410), intermediate data is set in the probability setting value display data area as the probability setting value display data (A2411), and the set probability setting value display data (intermediate data). ) Is output (A2412). In this case, the performance display device 152 has a display mode based on the intermediate data until the next probability set value display data is output (A2404). If the time for displaying the intermediate data is short and the operator cannot recognize it, the timer for delaying by a predetermined time may be activated after outputting the probability set value display data (intermediate data).

As a display mode of the intermediate data, an LED for displaying the numerical value of each digit of the 4-digit performance display device 152 (light emitting member: here, 8 segments a, b, c, d, e, f, g, Dp). ) Is turned off (FIGS. 69 and 70), all the LEDs are turned on (FIG. 71), and some specific positions of the LEDs are turned on (FIG. 72). It is different from the display mode shown).

Further, there is also a display mode in which the display of the display probability setting value is left as it is, and at least one of the LEDs having a digit different from the digit for displaying the display probability setting value is emitted (FIG. 73).

Further, during the setting change, the display probability setting value information transmitted (displayed) by the game control device 100 (FIG. 3) to the performance display device 152 includes LEDs (segments a and b) for displaying the display probability setting value. , C, d, e, f, g) as well as the lighting pattern data for lighting the dot-shaped LED (segment Dp) at the lower right of the LED (Dp = 1) (additional information). Is included. Therefore, as intermediate data, a display mode in which all the LEDs constituting the performance display device 152 including dots are turned off (FIG. 74), and a display mode in which all other LEDs are turned off while maintaining the lighting of the segment Dp (FIG. 75). ) Also.

By the way, the game control device 100 transmits information on the work setting value (probability setting value) after the setting change to the effect control device 300 (FIG. 4) (FIGS. 6B and A1044), and the effect control device 300 receives the information. (FIG. 50, B1323), it can be used as an effect setting value (effect setting value). Then, as shown in FIG. 67, the effect control device 300 includes the effect control information "1" to "6" corresponding to the work set values "0" to "5" as the effect set values. Here, the effect control device 300 can make the effect different contents based on the effect control information "1" to "6" as the effect set value. For example, in the variable effect setting process of FIG. 55, the effect content is set based on the set value. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the gaming machine 10 by changing the effect control information each time the probability set value is changed to give variation to the effect.

[Display example of performance display device]
FIG. 69 is a schematic diagram showing a display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment. The intermediate data in FIG. 69 has a display mode in which all the LEDs constituting the performance display device 152 are turned off.

Further, in the probability setting value display data, the character "S" appears in the digit 3 of the performance display device 152, the character "E" appears in the digit 2, and the character "T" appears in the digit 1 (of "SET"). It has a display mode in which the LED is lit so that the character appears) and the value of the current display probability setting value appears in the digit 0. Further, in the probability setting value display data, the LEDs of the digit 1, the digit 2, and the digit 3 are turned off, and the value of the current probability setting value for display appears in the digit 0 (may be displayed in another digit). It is also possible to provide a display mode in which the LED is lit.

As shown in FIG. 69, when the power is turned on while the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on, the setting change mode (setting variable state) is set. In this case, the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c of the game control device 100 (here, any value of "1" to "6" is used as the previous final work setting value. 1) is read, the character "S" appears in the digit 3 of the performance display device 152, the character "E" appears in the digit 2, the character "T" appears in the digit 1, and the digit 0 appears. In, the value "1" of one kind of display probability setting value is lit and displayed, and the character "SET1" is lit and displayed as a whole. In the work setting value area (in RAM111c or register) when the setting variable state (setting change mode) is entered, the value corresponding to the probability setting value read from the probability setting value area (1 subtraction from the probability setting value). Value) may be stored.

Then, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed, the value of the work set value is changed (for example, from "0" to "1"), and all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off for a predetermined time. Alternatively, the display mode may be such that the display probability setting value "1" is temporarily turned off while the "SET" is kept lit.

Then, after the lapse of the predetermined time, the character "SET1" (there is no change in appearance) including the changed display probability setting value "1" corresponding to the changed work setting value (for example, "1"). Is lit and displayed.

When the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed again, the value of the work set value is changed (for example, from "1" to "2"), and all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off for a predetermined time.

Then, after the lapse of the predetermined time, the character "SET1" (there is no change in appearance) including the changed display probability setting value "1" corresponding to the changed work setting value (for example, "2"). Is lit and displayed.

As described above, each time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the character "SET1" including the display probability setting value "1" can be identified so as to be temporarily turned off and then turned on again. , When the setting key switch 93 is turned off, all the lights are turned off. Further, each time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the work setting value in the work setting value area is changed, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the work setting value is changed to the last updated work setting value. The corresponding probability setting value is stored in the probability setting value area.

FIG. 70 is a schematic diagram showing a display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 or the setting example 3 of the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment.

First, in FIG. 70, the case where the display probability setting value is the setting example 3 and the work setting value at the start of setting change is “1” is considered for convenience.

When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 turned on, the performance display device 152 (digit 0) includes the display probability setting value "1" corresponding to the work setting value "1". The character "SET1" to be displayed is lit and displayed.

Then, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed, the value of the work set value is changed (from "1" to "2"), and all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off for a predetermined time.

Then, after the lapse of the predetermined time, the character "SET1" (there is no change in appearance) including the changed display probability setting value "1" corresponding to the changed work setting value (for example, "2"). It is lit and displayed.

When the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed again, the value of the work set value is changed (from "2" to "3"), and all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off for a predetermined time.

Then, after the lapse of a predetermined time, the character "SET2" including the display probability setting value "2" corresponding to the changed work setting value "3" is lit and displayed. As a result, the operator can visually recognize that the display probability setting value has been changed from "1" to "2" by pressing the RAM initialization switch 112.

As described above, each time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the display probability setting value changes as the work setting value changes (1 → 1 → 2 → 2 → 2 → 1 → ...). When the value of the display probability setting value is switched, the light is temporarily turned off, then the next display probability setting value is displayed, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, all the lights are turned off.

Next, in FIG. 70, a case where the display probability setting value is the setting example 4 and the work setting value at the start of setting change is “0” is considered for convenience.

When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 turned on, the performance display device 152 (digit 0) includes the display probability setting value "1" corresponding to the work setting value "0". The character "SET1" to be displayed is lit and displayed.

Then, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed, the value of the work set value is changed (from "0" to "1"), and all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off for a predetermined time.

Then, after the lapse of the predetermined time, the character "SET1" (there is no change in appearance) including the changed display probability setting value "1" corresponding to the changed work setting value "1" is lit and displayed. To.

When the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed again, the value of the work set value is changed (from "1" to "2"), and all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off for a predetermined time.

Then, after the lapse of the predetermined time, the character "SET2" including the changed display probability setting value "2" corresponding to the changed work setting value "2" is lit and displayed. As a result, the operator can visually recognize that the display probability setting value has been changed from "1" to "2" by pressing the RAM initialization switch 112. After that, although not shown, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed twice, the character "SET3" including the display probability setting value "3" corresponding to the work setting value "4" is lit and displayed.

As described above, each time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the display probability setting value changes as the work setting value changes (1 → 1 → 2 → 2 → 3 → 3 → 1 → ...・) Is changed. Further, when the value of the display probability setting value is switched, all the LEDs are turned off for a predetermined time, and then the next display probability setting value is turned on and displayed. Further, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, all the LEDs are turned off.

FIG. 71 is a schematic diagram showing a first modification of the display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment. The modification described below will be described by taking Setting Example 2 as an example, but can also be applied to Setting Example 1, Setting Example 3, and Setting Example 4.

In the first modification, in the intermediate data, contrary to FIG. 69 (or FIG. 70), all the LEDs in the digit 3, the digit 2, the digit 1, and the digit 0 of the performance display device 152 are lit and displayed (at least the digits). 3. It is sufficient that any of the digits of the digit 2 and the digit 1 is lit and displayed). On the other hand, in the probability set value display data, all the LEDs are turned off in the digit 3, the digit 2, and the digit 1 of the performance display device 152 (may be a mode in which the character "SET" is displayed as described above), and in the digit 0. It has a display mode in which the LED constituting the display of the display probability set value is turned on.

The display mode of the display probability set value in the first modification transitions in the same manner as in FIG. 70. On the other hand, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed, all the LEDs of the predetermined time, digit 3, digit 2, digit 1, and digit 0 are turned on by the intermediate data, and then the changed display probability setting value is displayed. ..

Therefore, every time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the lighting display of the display probability setting value of digit 0 is turned off for a predetermined time, and instead, all the LEDs of digit 3, digit 2, digit 1, and digit 0 are turned on. Lights up for a predetermined time.

FIG. 72 is a schematic diagram showing a second modification of the display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment. The second modification shown in FIG. 72 transitions in the same manner as the display mode shown in FIG. 69 except for the display mode of the intermediate data. On the other hand, the intermediate data is displayed in the same digit (digit 0) as the display probability setting value, and has a display mode different from the display probability setting value before the change and the display probability setting value after the change.

As shown in FIG. 72, the intermediate data has, for example, a display mode in which only the LED (segment g) having digit 0 is turned on. In addition, in the second modification, any display mode other than the display indicating the display probability setting value can be applied. Further, the other digits (digit 3, digit 2, digit 1) may be arbitrarily displayed by the intermediate data.

Therefore, every time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the lighting display of the display probability setting value of the digit 0 is turned off for a predetermined time, and instead, the LED (for example, the segment g) at the specific position of the digit 0 is turned on for a predetermined time. do.

FIG. 73 is a schematic diagram showing a third modification of the display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment. The third modification shown in FIG. 73 transitions in the same manner as the display mode shown in FIG. 69 except for the display mode of the intermediate data. On the other hand, the intermediate data is also displayed in a digit (digit 3, digit 2, digit 1) different from the digit (digit 0) in which the display probability setting value is displayed, and in digit 0, the display probability setting value is displayed. The display is maintained. That is, the intermediate data is different from the display probability setting value before the change and the display probability setting value after the change as a whole, but the digit for displaying the display probability setting value is the display probability setting value before the change. It is a display mode for sharing information.

In the third modification, the game control device 100 has information on the display probability setting value (digit 0) stored in the probability setting value display data area and intermediate data (digit 3, digit 2, digits 2) related to the third modification. Digits 1) are combined and the combined data (intermediate data) is set in the probability setting value display data area as the probability setting value display data (executed in FIG. 68, A2411).

As shown in FIG. 73, the intermediate data has a display mode in which all the LEDs of the digit 3, the digit 2, and the digit 1 are turned on, and the composite data includes all the digits 3, the digit 2, and the digit 1. The LED is lit, and the display mode is provided in which the LED displaying the display probability setting value before the change is lit at digit 0. The probability set value display data has a display mode in which the probability set value is lit and displayed in the digit 0, and the digit 3, the digit 2, and the digit 1 are turned off, but the character "SET" is displayed in the same manner as described above. You may try to do it.

Therefore, every time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, all the LEDs of the digit 3, the digit 2, and the digit 1 are turned on for a predetermined time, and the lighting display of the display probability set value during that time is also maintained.

FIG. 74 is a schematic diagram showing a fourth modification of the display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment. The fourth modification shown in FIG. 74 transitions in the same manner as the display mode shown in FIG. 69 except for the display by the display probability setting value (additional information).

In the fourth modification, the game control device 100 is in the setting variable state (first state) by turning on the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 and turning on the power to the game machine 10 in the same manner as described above. .. At this time, the game control device 100 adds dot data (Dp = 1) (additional information) to the probability set value display data. Thereby, it can be shown that the displayed display probability setting value "1." is a provisional value during the setting change.

On the other hand, the intermediate data has a display mode in which all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off. Therefore, every time the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed, the LED displaying the "SET" of the digit 3, the digit 2, and the digit 1 on the performance display device 152, and the LED displaying the probability setting value "1" for displaying the digit 0. And the LED (segment Dp) displaying the dot of digit 0 is turned off for a predetermined time.

By turning off the setting key switch 93, the setting is completed (second state). At this time, the game control device 100 indicates the probability setting value display data (digit 3, digit 2, digit 1) indicating the display probability setting value (including dot data (Dp = 0)) after the setting is changed (after confirmation). By setting the probability setting display data area (the LED displaying "SET" is turned off), the display probability setting value "1" after the setting change is displayed for a predetermined time, and then the display probability setting value is displayed. Turn off the lighting display of "1".

FIG. 75 is a schematic diagram showing a fifth modification of the display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment. The fifth modification shown in FIG. 75 transitions in the same manner as the display mode of the fourth modification shown in FIG. 74, except for the display by the intermediate data.

On the other hand, as the intermediate data, the LED displaying the "SET" of the digit 3, the digit 2, and the digit 1 and the LED displaying the display probability setting value of the digit 0 are turned off, and the dot data (Dp = 1) (additional information). ) Is lit by the LED (segment Dp). Therefore, every time the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed, the LED displaying the character "SET" of the digit 3, the digit 2, and the digit 1 and the LED displaying the display probability setting value of the digit 0 on the performance display device 152 are displayed. While the light is turned off, the LED (segment Dp) displaying the dot of digit 0 is kept on. Therefore, it can be easily identified that the display of the performance display device 152 is reacting in response to the operation and the setting is being changed.

[Action / effect of the second embodiment]
The present embodiment includes a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a game (a variable display game in which identification information is variablely displayed based on the establishment of a start condition), and when the result of the game is a special result, In the game machine 10 capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, the setting changing means (RAM initialization switch 112, setting) capable of changing the setting value (working setting value, probability setting value) according to the setting related to the game. A key switch 93) and a display unit (performance display device 152) capable of displaying information on set values (information corresponding to jackpot probability, display probability set value) by causing a light emitting member (LED) to emit light. The setting changing means includes a first switch (RAM initialization switch 112) for changing the set value (working set value), and the game control means (game control device 100) is a first switch (RAM). It is possible to change the set value (working setting value) in response to the operation of the initialization switch 112) and display the information (display probability setting value) related to the changed setting value on the display unit (performance display device 152). When the setting value (working setting value) is changed, the information about the setting value before the change (display probability setting value) and the information about the changed setting value (display probability setting value) are different from the intermediate information. After displaying (intermediate data) on the display unit (performance display device 152), information (display probability setting value) regarding the changed set value is displayed on the display unit (performance display device 152).

With the above configuration, intermediate data whose display mode is different from the information (display probability setting value) regarding the setting value before and after the change temporarily before and after the change of the probability setting value is displayed, so that the operator can change the setting. It is possible to identify whether or not the display of the display unit (performance display device 152) is responding to the operation of the operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112).

In the present embodiment, the information regarding the set value (display probability set value) is the same regardless of the set value (working set value), and is the information corresponding to the probability value at which the game has a special result.

In the above configuration, the information (display probability setting value) regarding the set value is not changed before and after the operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) is pressed, but the above intermediate data is displayed, so that the operation unit (RAM initialization) is displayed. It is possible to identify whether or not the display of the display unit (performance display device 152) is responding to the operation of the conversion switch 112).

In the present embodiment, the intermediate information (intermediate data) is characterized by information that turns off all the light emitting members (LEDs) or information that turns on all the light emitting members.

With the above configuration, it is possible to easily identify the change from the information regarding the setting value before the change (probability setting value for display) to the information regarding the setting value after the change (probability setting value for display).

In the present embodiment, the display unit (performance display device 152) has a plurality of digits, and the intermediate information (intermediate data) has a digit different from the digit for displaying the information (display probability setting value) regarding the set value. Is displayed.

With the above configuration, the display of the intermediate data indicates that the display unit (performance display device 152) is responding to the operation, and the information on the set value (probability setting value for display) is not erased, so the information on the set value (for display). It is possible to avoid a decrease in visibility of the probability set value).

In the present embodiment, the display unit (performance display device 152) has information on the set value (display probability set value) and additional information (Dp = 1) different from the information on the set value (display probability set value). , And the setting changing means (RAM initialization switch 112, setting key switch 93) is a second switch for shifting to a setting variable state in which the setting value (working setting value) can be changed. The second switch (setting key switch 93) is provided with (setting key switch 93), and the state is variable between a first state that allows transition to the setting variable state and a second state that terminates the setting variable state. It is possible, and the game control means (game control device 100) transmits (displays) additional information (Dp = 1) together with information regarding the set value (display probability set value) in the first state, and the second state. At this time, the transmission (display) of the additional information is stopped (dot data (Dp = 0) is transmitted), and the intermediate information (intermediate data) includes the additional information (dot data (Dp = 1)).

With the above configuration, even if the operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) is pressed during the setting change, the LED (segment Dp) indicating that the setting is being changed is maintained without turning off, so that the setting is being changed. It is possible to improve the reliability of the display indicating.

In the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect related to the game is provided, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) controls the effect based on the set value (working set value). , The game control means (game control device 100) transmits information on the changed set values (final work set value, probability set value) to the effect control means (effect control device 300).

With the above configuration, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the changed set value, so that it is possible to improve the interest in the gaming machine 10 by giving variations to the effect.

[Third Embodiment]
A third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 80. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first embodiment and the second embodiment. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first embodiment and the second embodiment, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted as appropriate. The third embodiment relates to accepting an input in a setting change state.

[Probability setting change / confirmation process]
First, with reference to FIG. 76, the probability setting change / confirmation process according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the probability setting change / confirmation process according to the third embodiment.

In addition to the probability setting change / confirmation process according to the first embodiment, the processes of A2601 and A2602 are added to the probability setting change / confirmation process according to the third embodiment.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input of a predetermined switch after performing the processes of steps A2401 to A2410 as described above in the probability setting change / confirmation process according to the first embodiment (A2601). ). The input of the predetermined switch is, for example, the input of the start port switch (start port 1 switch 36a, start port 2 switch 37a), the gate switch 34a, and the winning port switches 35a to 35n. It should be noted that the input of the predetermined switch is an interface chip (proximity I / F) such as a specific area switch 72, a large winning port switch 43 of the special variable winning device 38, 39, a remaining ball ejection port switch 73, and an out ball detection switch 74. ) 121 may be included (see FIG. 3).

When there is an input of a predetermined switch (the result of A2601 is "Y"), the game control device 100 executes a process corresponding to the switch input (A2602), and ends the probability setting change / confirmation process.

In the process corresponding to the switch input (A2602), the game control device 100 transmits a switch input command indicating that the switch input has been made to the effect control device 300. Further, the effect control device 300 lights the start port LED and the like by receiving the switch input command from the game control device 100 by the process of step B3302 of the single-shot system command process described later. Similarly, the game control device 100 may output an on / off drive signal to the batch display device 50 via the second driver 138b and the third driver 138c to light the batch display device 50.

On the other hand, when there is no input of a predetermined switch (the result of A2601 is "N"), the game control device 100 ends the probability setting change / confirmation process as it is.

[Single-shot command processing]
FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing a procedure of one-shot command processing according to the third embodiment.

In addition to the one-shot command processing according to the first embodiment, the processing of B3301 and B3302 is added to the one-shot command processing according to the third embodiment.

The effect control device 300 performs the processing from step B1301 to step B1327 as described above in the one-shot system command processing according to the first embodiment, and then if the MODE unit does not represent the setting confirmation system command (B1327). The result of is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the MODE unit is within the range of the switch input command (B3301). When the MODE unit is within the range of the switch input command, the effect control device 300 receives the switch input command from the game control device 100, and determines that there is a switch input.

When the MODE unit represents a switch input command (the result of B3301 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 executes the switch input time processing (B3302), and then ends the single-shot command processing.

In the switch input processing (B3302), the effect control device 300 turns on the start port LED or displays a check item on the display screen of the display device 41 by receiving the switch input command. When the effect control device 300 receives the switch input command, the decorative LEDs may be sequentially turned on, or the movable accessory or the speaker 19 (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b) may be operated.

On the other hand, when the MODE unit does not represent the switch input command (the result of B3301 is "N"), the effect control device 300 is set to step B1329 or later as described above in the one-shot command processing according to the first embodiment. Proceed with the processing of.

[Hall / player setting mode processing]
With reference to FIG. 78, the details of the hole / player setting mode process (B0011) in the above-mentioned main process (FIG. 47) will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hall / player setting mode processing according to the third embodiment. Hall / player setting mode processing activates a hall setting mode in which the person in charge of the hall (game store) can make various settings for the gaming machine 10, or a player setting mode in which the player can make various settings for the gaming machine 10. be able to.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the hall setting mode is in progress (B0401). When the hole setting mode flag described later is set, it can be determined that the hole setting mode is in progress. When the hall setting mode is in effect (the result of B0401 is "Y"), the processing of B0406-B0416 is performed, and the effect button 25 (effect button switch 25a, touch panel 25b) is operated by the person in charge of the hall (game store). Make various settings and adjustments based on.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the player is in the player setting mode (B0402) when the hall setting mode is not in progress (the result of B0401 is “N”). When the player setting mode flag described later is set, it can be determined that the player setting mode is in progress. When the player setting mode is in progress (the result of B0402 is "Y"), the processing of B0420-B0425 is performed, and various settings and adjustments are made based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player.

When the effect control device 300 is not in the player setting mode (the result of B0402 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the hole setting mode start condition is satisfied (B0403). For example, when the operation of the effect button 25 for entering the hall setting mode is detected as an operation signal by the effect button input process (B0010) while waiting for a customer or in the setting change state, the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied. It can be determined that it has been done. Note that waiting for a customer is, for example, a state in which a video for waiting for a customer (demo waiting for a customer) is displayed on the display device 41. Further, when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is open during the setting change state (when an error / illegal command related to the front frame open error is received (B1316)), the effect button input process (B0010). ) May enter the hall setting mode when the operation of the effect button 25 is detected as an operation signal. When the hole setting mode start condition is not satisfied (the result of B0403 is "N"), the process of B0417 is executed.

The effect control device 300 draws a screen for starting screen drawing (drawing of the hall setting screen) for the display device 41 in the hall setting mode when the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B0403 is “Y”). Set the start (B0404). Then, the flag in the hall setting mode is set (B0405).

Next, the effect control device 300 adjusts and sets the volume of the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the person in charge of the hall, the hall volume adjustment process (B0406), the frame decoration device 18, and the frame decoration device 18. Hall LED brightness adjustment process (B0407) that adjusts and sets the LED brightness of the board decoration device 46, liquid crystal brightness adjustment process (B0408) that adjusts and sets the brightness of the display unit (liquid crystal display, etc.) of the display device 41, and power saving. The power saving setting process (B0409) for setting the above is executed. The setting values related to the volume of the speaker, the brightness of the LED, the brightness of the display device 41, and the setting value of power saving are the setting values in the hall setting mode.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes a logo color setting process for setting the issuance color and the like of the logo accessory (B0410). Then, it is determined whether or not there is a setting confirmation operation input (B0411). When the operation signal by the setting confirmation operation of the effect button 25 is detected by the effect button input process (B0010), it can be determined that the setting confirmation operation input has been performed. When there is no setting confirmation operation input (the result of B0411 is "N"), the hall / player setting mode processing is terminated.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the setting is confirmed by the factory setting when the setting confirmation operation input is received (the result of B0411 is “Y”) (B0412). When the effect button 25 is not operated other than the setting confirmation operation, it can be determined that the setting is confirmed at the time of shipment from the factory. If it is not confirmed by the factory setting (the result of B0412 is "N"), the process proceeds to B0414. When the factory setting is confirmed (the result of B0412 is "Y"), the factory setting process for performing various settings and adjustments in the factory setting is executed (B0413). The factory default setting is the default setting stored in the memory such as ROM 321. Next, the hall setting data (or hall adjustment data) such as the volume and various luminances determined by B0406-B0410 and B0413 are written to the backup memory (for example, FeRAM323) (B0414).

Next, the effect control device 300 sets the screen drawing end setting for ending the screen drawing for the display device 41 in the hall setting mode (B0415). Then, the flag in the hole setting mode is cleared (B0416).

When the hall setting mode start condition is not satisfied (the result of B0403 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (B0417). It can be determined that the player setting mode start condition is satisfied when the operation of the effect button 25 for entering the player setting mode is detected as an operation signal in the effect button input process (B0010) while waiting for a customer. When the player setting mode start condition is not satisfied (the result of B0417 is "N"), the hall / player setting mode processing is terminated.

When the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B0417 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 sets the screen drawing start setting for starting the screen drawing for the display device 41 in the player setting mode (the result of B0417 is “Y”). B0418). Then, the player setting mode flag is set (B0419).

Next, the effect control device 300 includes a player volume adjustment process (B0420) for adjusting the volume of the upper speaker 10a and the lower speaker 10b based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player, and the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration. The player LED brightness adjustment process (B0421) for adjusting the brightness of the LED of the device 46 is executed.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes an effect customization process (B0422), which will be described later, to customize (individually set) the effect based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the like by the player. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a setting confirmation operation input (B0423). When there is no setting confirmation operation input (the result of B0423 is "N"), the hall / player setting mode processing is terminated. When there is a setting confirmation operation input (the result of B0423 is "Y"), the screen drawing end setting for ending the screen drawing for the display device 41 in the player setting mode is performed (B0424). Then, the flag in the player setting mode is cleared (B0425). Note that the player setting data (or player adjustment data) such as the volume and brightness determined by B0420-B0421 may be erased, and therefore are not written to the backup memory.

In the above, the drawing update setting (update of the highlight item in the menu display, etc.) after once entering the hall setting mode or the player setting mode shall be performed by the effect button input process (B0010).

[Game board whose settings are being changed]
FIG. 79 is a front view of the game board 30 in the setting change state according to the third embodiment.

On the game board 30 (including the center case 40) according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 79, LEDs (light emitting diodes) of the board decoration device 46 capable of emitting light are provided in front of the start gate 34 and each of them. It is provided in front of the general winning opening 35 and in front of each. The LED provided in front of the normal drawing start gate 34 is the normal drawing start gate LED 34L, and the LED provided in front of each general winning opening 35 is the general winning opening LED 35L.

When the effect control device 300 according to the third embodiment receives the command during the probability setting change, the display screen of the display device 41 indicates that the setting is being changed. Display characters (setting change system information setting process of B1326).

Here, when the game control device 100 is in the setting change state (setting variable state, setting change mode), the set value is set in the processes of steps A2601 and A2602 of the probability setting change / confirmation process as described above in FIG. It functions as a control means capable of accepting an input from the gate switch 34a and the winning opening switches 35a to 35n, which are inputs different from the input related to the change of. Then, when the game control device 100 receives the input from the gate switch 34a and the winning opening switches 35a to 35n, the game control device 100 transmits a switch input command corresponding to the received input to the effect control device 300.

Then, when the effect control device 300 receives the switch input command from the game control device 100 in the process of steps B3301 and B3302 of the single-shot system command process of FIG. 77, the effect control device 300 receives the switch input command, and the LED of the board decoration device 46 corresponding to the switch input command. (Public figure start gate LED 34L and general winning opening LED 35L) are turned on or blinked.

Therefore, in the setting change state, by passing or winning a game ball through the pachinko starting gate 34 or each general winning opening 35, the corresponding pachinko starting gate LED 34L or the general winning opening LED 35L is lit or blinks. The operation can be easily checked and the maintainability of the gaming machine 10 can be improved. As a result, for example, the operation of the gaming machine 10 can be easily confirmed at the time of shipment from the factory, so that the initially defective gaming machine 10 can be detected at an early stage.

The effect control device 300 turns on or blinks the LEDs (normal drawing start gate LED 34L and general winning opening LED 35L) of the board decoration device 46 corresponding to the switch input command, and then turns the other LEDs that do not correspond in order. It may be lit or blinking. According to such an aspect, the operation check of the LED of various board decoration devices 46 can be easily performed only by receiving one of the switch input commands from the game control device 100, so that the maintenance of the game machine 10 can be performed. It is possible to improve the sex.

Further, the game control device 100 corresponds to the reception of inputs from the gate switch 34a and the winning opening switches 35a to 35n, and the display units 51 to 60 (LED lamp, special figure 1 display 51) of the batch display device 50. , Special figure 2 display 52, normal figure display 53, special figure 1 hold display 54, special figure 2 hold display 55, normal figure hold display 56, first game state display unit 57, second game state display The unit 58, the third game state display unit 59, and the round display unit 60) may be turned on or blinked as appropriate. The game control device 100 turns on or blinks the display unit (any of the display units 51 to 60) of the batch display device 50 corresponding to the received input, and then all the display units (display units 51 to 60). May be turned on or blinked so that the operation of the entire display units 51 to 60 of the batch display device 50 can be checked (processing of A2602). Further, the operation check of the entire display units 51 to 60 of the batch display device 50 is not limited to the mode of all lighting or all blinking, but may be a mode of circulating lighting so that it is easy to confirm that the light is normally emitted.

Further, when the effect control device 300 receives the switch input command from the game control device 100 and performs the switch input time processing (B3302), as shown in FIG. 79, the effect control device 300 displays a checklist on the display screen of the display device 41. It may be displayed. In the checklist, for example, a normal operation checked display such as "○" is displayed in the item of each switch corresponding to the received input.

As shown in FIG. 79, the effect control device 300 starts the checklist in response to the game control device 100 receiving the input of the start port switch (start port 1 switch 36a, start port 2 switch 37a). The normal operation checked display (“◯”) may be displayed in the items of the opening 1 and the starting opening 2.

Further, an LED (starting winning opening LED36L) of the panel decoration device 46 is provided in front of the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1, first starting winning area), and the LED is turned on according to the corresponding switch input command. Or you may make it blink. Further, the effect control device 300 may operate the speaker 19 (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b) as the effect device according to the corresponding switch input command. At that time, for example, when the effect control device 300 receives the switch input command corresponding to the gate switch 34a, the effect control device 300 can make a voice notification of "normal figure start gate!", And receives the switch input command corresponding to the winning opening switches 35a to 35n. You can make a voice notification saying "General winning opening!".

Further, during the setting change, the game control device 100 receives a signal from the front frame opening detection switch 64, which is output when the front frame 12 and the like are open, and issues an error / illegal command to the effect control device 300. When the effect control device 300 receives the operation of the effect button 25 during transmission, the effect control device 300 says that the process of step B0403 of the hall / player setting mode process is established as described above in FIG. 78. Judgment (the result of B0403 is "Y").

Therefore, since the effect control device 300 executes the processing after step B0404, the hall setting can be performed while the setting is changed. As described above, the game control device 100 functions as a control means that can accept the signal from the front frame opening detection switch 64 as an input different from the input related to the change of the set value when the setting is changed. Further, the effect control device 300 accepts the operation of the effect button 25 in the state where the front frame 12 and the like are open, so that the input related to the hall setting is received as an input different from the input related to the change of the set value during the setting change state. It functions as a control means capable of changing the set value of the hall setting (for example, the volume of the speaker, the brightness of the LED, etc.).

[Another example of a game board whose settings are being changed]
FIG. 80 is another example of the front view of the game board 30 whose setting is being changed according to the third embodiment.

In another example of the game board 30, as shown in FIG. 80, the effect control device 300 has a general drawing start gate LED 34L, a general winning opening LED 35L, a starting winning opening LED 36L, a general drawing variation winning LED 37L, and a first special variation. The winning LED 38L and the second special variable winning LED 39L are also made to emit light. The normal variable winning LED 37L is an LED provided in front of the normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2, second starting winning opening). The first special variable winning LED 38L is an LED provided in front of the first special variable winning device 38, and the second special variable winning LED 39L is an LED provided in front of the second special variable winning device 39.

The normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38, and the second special variable winning device 39 whose settings are being changed are closed by a slide opening / closing movable member 37b and an attacker type opening / closing door 38c, 39c, respectively.

Therefore, for example, the effect control device 300 lights or blinks the normal figure variation winning LED 37L, the first special variation winning LED 38L, and the second special variation winning LED 39L in response to the effect button 25 or the like being pressed while the setting is being changed. Can be made to. The lighting of the general variation winning LED 37L, the first special variation winning LED 38L, the second special variation winning LED 39L, and the like may be performed in order or at the same time.

Further, when the game control device 100 receives an input of a predetermined switch (the result of A2601 is "Y"), the movable member 37b and the opening / closing doors 38c and 39c are opened, and the normal variable winning device 37 and the first 1 The special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 may be in a state where the game ball can be directly won.

Further, in the game board 30 of another example, the effect control device 300 can emit light of the upper effect unit LED 40 cL and the side effect unit LED 40 dL, which are the LEDs of the board decoration device 46. The upper effect unit LED 40cL is an LED provided in the upper effect unit 40c. The side effect unit LED 40dL is an LED provided on the blade portion of the sword possessed by the character of the side effect unit 40d. For example, the effect control device 300 lights or blinks the upper effect unit LED 40 cL and the side effect unit LED 40 dL in response to the effect button 25 or the like being pressed while the setting is being changed. The upper effect unit LED 40 cL and the side effect unit LED 40 dL may be turned on in order or at the same time.

In this way, by causing the LED of the accessory (decorative member) to emit light in addition to the LED of the winning opening and the winning device, the operation check of the LED of the accessory (decorative member) can be easily performed. Maintainability can be improved. It should be noted that the maintainability may be further improved by moving a movable accessory or the like as a production device at the time of light emission so that it can be confirmed whether the motor of the movable accessory or the like moves normally.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with a lamp display device 80 (lamp display units 1 to 6 (LEDs) provided on the lower right side of the game area 32, for example, in response to the effect button 25 or the like being pressed while the setting is being changed. )) May be combined to emit light.

[Action / effect of the third embodiment]
In the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment, the stop result of the variable display game (special figure variable display game) for variablely displaying the identification information (identification information, decorative special symbol, decorative first symbols A to C, this special figure) is When a special result (big hit result) is obtained, a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player can be generated. The gaming machine 10 includes a control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) that controls the game, and a setting changing means (setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112) that can change the setting value related to the game condition. , Equipped with. The control means can accept an input different from the input related to the change of the set value when the setting value can be changed by the setting change means in the setting change state (setting variable state, setting change mode).

According to such a gaming machine 10, when the setting value can be changed in the setting change state, the control means can accept the input related to the management and maintenance of the gaming machine 10 such as the hall setting and the operation check. It is possible to improve the manageability and maintainability of the gaming machine 10.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment, the control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) is a predetermined input (front frame opening) as an input different from the input related to the change of the set value during the setting change state. When the signal from the detection switch 64 and the signal from the effect button 25 are received, it is possible to change the set value as well as the set value (set value in the hall setting) different from the set value during the setting change state.

According to such a gaming machine 10, the setting value of the hall setting can be changed as a setting value different from the setting value related to the game condition when the setting is changed, so that the person in charge of the game hall (game store) can change the setting value. It is possible to improve the maintainability by the above. In addition, since the setting change state is usually transferred by the operation of the person in charge of the game hall (game store), the setting value of the hall setting can be changed in the setting change state, so that the game field can be changed. It is possible to prevent the setting value of the hall setting from being unnecessarily changed by a person who is not responsible for.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment is a batch display device in addition to a light emitting device capable of emitting light (LEDs of the board decoration device 46 (particularly LEDs in front of the first starting winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening)). Display units 51 to 60) of 50, a predetermined area provided in the game area 32 where the game ball can enter or pass, and a detection means capable of detecting the entry or passage of the game ball into the predetermined area. Be prepared. When the control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) receives an input from the detection means as different inputs, the control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) causes the light emitting device to emit light.

According to such a gaming machine 10, it is possible to easily check whether various detecting means can normally detect a gaming ball and various light emitting devices emit light when the setting is changed, so that the game can be played. The maintainability of the machine 10 can be improved.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment, a plurality of light emitting devices (LEDs and the like of the board decoration device 46, etc.) are provided. The control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) can sequentially change the display of the plurality of light emitting devices to a predetermined display mode (for example, light emission) during the setting change state.

According to such a game machine 10, for example, the effect control device 300 simply receives one of the switch input commands from the game control device 100, and various light emitting devices (board decoration device 46) are in the setting change state. Since the operation of the LED (LED, effect device) can be easily checked, the maintainability of the gaming machine 10 can be improved.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment is provided in the gaming area 32 with an effect device (display device 41, board decoration device 46, lamp display device 80, etc.) capable of displaying a display related to the effect, and the game ball is provided. Predetermined areas where balls can be entered or passed (general drawing start gate 34, each general winning opening 35, first starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning area), second starting winning opening (second starting) of the normal variable winning device 37 (Winning area) and the like), and detection means (gate switch 34a, winning opening switches 35a to 35n, starting port switch, etc.) capable of detecting the entry or passage of a game ball into a predetermined area are provided. When the control means receives an input from the detection means as a different input, the display of the effect device can be changed to a predetermined display mode (LED light emission, display of normal operation checked display on the checklist).

According to such a gaming machine 10, for example, when the setting is changed, the gaming ball is passed through or entered into the normal drawing start gate 34, each general winning opening 35, or the like as a predetermined area. Since the starting gate LED 34L and the general winning opening LED 35L can be lit or blinked, and a checklist for passing or entering a ball can be displayed on the display device 41, it is possible to easily check the operation and improve the maintainability of the gaming machine 10. Can be done. As a result, for example, the operation of the gaming machine 10 can be easily confirmed at the time of shipment from the factory, so that the initially defective gaming machine 10 can be detected at an early stage.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment, the upper effect of the effect device (display device 41, LED of the board decoration device 46, the speaker 19, and the board effect device 44 (movable accessory, etc.)) capable of executing the effect. It is equipped with a unit 40c, a side effect unit 40d, etc.). The control means (effect control device 300) can operate the effect device when the setting is changed.

According to such a gaming machine 10, for example, as a production device, in addition to the light emission of the LED of the board decoration device 46, the sound is notified from the speaker 19, and when the light is emitted, a movable accessory or the like is movable as the production device. By doing so, it is possible to easily check the operation of the LED of the board effect device 44 as well as the operation of the motors such as the speaker 19 and the movable accessory when the setting is changed, and the maintainability of the gaming machine 10 is further improved. Can be made to.

[Fourth Embodiment]
A fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 86. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to third embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to third embodiments, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted as appropriate. The fourth embodiment relates to the operation of the gaming machine 10 when a power failure occurs in the special gaming state and the power is restored.

[Timing chart in the special gaming state of normal operation]
First, with reference to FIG. 81, the timing of signal output and the like in the special gaming state of normal operation will be described in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 81 is a timing chart showing an example of timing such as signal output in the special gaming state of normal operation according to the fourth embodiment.

First, as shown in FIG. 81, when the first big hit (special game state) occurs at time t1, external information is displayed in the special figure 1 display process (FIG. 37) or the special figure 2 display process (FIG. 38). As signals relating to the start of the jackpot (special game state) saved in the output data area, for example, one jackpot signal and two jackpot signals are output. The signal relating to the start of the jackpot is output as external information to the external information terminal 71 and thus to an external device (such as a hall computer). Specifically, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are started to be output when the stop result (display result) of the variable display game becomes the jackpot result (special result). The power of the gaming machine 10 is kept on, and the security signal is off.

The jackpot 1 signal is saved in the external information output data area by the fanfare / interval processing transition setting process (A5714) of the special figure 1 display process (FIG. 37) when the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit. If the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, it is saved in the external information output data area by the fanfare / interval processing transition setting process (A5816) of the special figure 2 display process (FIG. 38). If the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the big hit 2 signal is saved in the external information output data area in step A5709 of the special figure 1 display processing (FIG. 37), or the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit. In the case of, the data is saved in the external information output data area in step A5811 of the process during display of the special figure 2 (FIG. 38).

When the first jackpot ends at time t2, the output of the jackpot 1 signal is turned off. Specifically, for the output of the jackpot 1 signal, the signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area by the end of the special gaming state, that is, the jackpot end processing (FIGS. 40 and 41) after the round game. Then it turns off. On the other hand, after the end of the first big hit, the time is shortened (general electric support state, specific game state) or probable change state (specific game state, probability fluctuation state), and the output of the big hit 2 signal remains on. Will be done.

Specifically, when the off data of the big hit 1 signal is the end of the big hit by the special figure 1 variation display game, the big hit 1 signal is turned off, so that the step A6112 of the special figure 1 big hit end process (FIG. 40). Is saved in the external information output data area. Further, when the off data of the big hit 1 signal is the end of the big hit by the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the big hit 1 signal is turned off, so that the external information is obtained in step A6212 of the special figure 2 big hit end process (FIG. 41). Saved in the output data area.

When the big hit 2 signal is in the time saving state after the big hit ends, it is saved in the external information output data area in step A6501 of the big hit end setting process 2 and the output (on state) continues. If the big hit 2 signal is in a probable change state after the big hit ends, it is saved in the external information output data area in step A6801 of the big hit end setting process 3 and the output (on state) continues.

Subsequently, at time t3, when a big hit occurs again, that is, when a second big hit occurs, the output of the big hit 1 signal is turned on.

Then, at time t4, when the second big hit is completed, the output of the big hit 1 signal is turned off. Further, the second jackpot corresponds to a normal jackpot symbol (for example, a 10R normal jackpot symbol), the time reduction determination data is data with a reduced time, and there is no specific area passage information (the result of A6104 is "N". ”) (No V prize), the jackpot end setting process 2 is executed (A6103). Therefore, after the end of the second big hit, the time is shortened (normal power support state).

After that, at time t5, when the variation display game in the time reduction state reaches, for example, 100 times after the end of the second big hit, the number of remaining games in the time reduction state (the number of time reduction fluctuations) becomes 0 and the time reduction state ends. do. At that time, the output of the big hit 2 signal is turned off by saving the off data of the big hit 2 signal in the external information output data area in step A5105 of the time reduction variation number update process. Further, when the game including the special gaming state is performed in the normal operation as described above, the power of the gaming machine 10 is maintained in the on state, and the security signal remains off.

In addition, unlike the above, when the probable change state is reached after the end of the second big hit, the probable change state ends when the fall lottery is won in the fall lottery process (FIG. 20), and at that time, the output of the big hit 2 signal is output. The off data of the big hit 2 signals is saved in the external information output data area (A3704), so that the data is turned off.

[Timing chart for normal recovery after a power failure during a special game state]
With reference to FIG. 82, in the fourth embodiment, the timing of signal output and the like when a power failure occurs in the special gaming state and the normal recovery is performed by the power recovery will be described. FIG. 82 is a timing chart showing an example of timing such as signal output when a power failure occurs in the special gaming state according to the fourth embodiment and normal recovery is performed by power recovery. In addition, in FIGS. 82 to 86 below, the content overlapping with the content described with reference to FIG. 81 and the like will be omitted as appropriate.

At time t1, when the first big hit (special game state) occurs, as in FIG. 81 described above, one big hit signal and two big hit signals are output. In addition, the security signal is maintained in the off state.

When a power failure occurs during the first jackpot (for example, during a round game) at time t11, the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off and the jackpot game is interrupted, as shown in FIG. 82. Further, as the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are also turned off.

When the power is restored (power failure recovery) and the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on at time t12, the gaming machine 10 is normally restored to the state before the power failure by the power failure recovery process (A1045) of the main process. The output state (on state) of the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal is saved (stored) in the RAM at the time of power failure (A1057, A1058), and the game control device 100 has the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal at the time of power recovery. Save data (stored information) about the output state, that is, the jackpot state is retained (maintained) internally. Therefore, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal that were on before the power failure are turned on, and the first jackpot game is restarted.

When the first jackpot ends at time t13, the output of the jackpot 1 signal is turned off. On the other hand, after the end of the first big hit, it is in a time saving state (normal electric support state) or a probability change state (specific game state, probability fluctuation state), and the output of the big hit 2 signal is maintained in the on state.

After that, the signal output after the occurrence of the second big hit from time t14 to time t16 is the same as the signal output from time t3 to time t5 described above in FIG. 81.

When a power failure occurs during the second big hit, the time saving state, or the probable change state, the big hit 1 signal and the big hit 2 signal are similarly turned off. Then, when the power is restored and the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the gaming machine 10 is normally restored to the state before the power failure by the power failure recovery process (A1045) of the main process, and the second big hit, the time saving state or the probability change state is restarted. can do.

[Timing chart when a memory error occurs after a power failure in a special game state]
In the fourth embodiment with reference to FIG. 83, the timing of signal output and the like when a power failure occurs in the special gaming state and a memory abnormality occurs in the power recovery will be described. FIG. 83 is a timing chart showing an example of timing such as signal output when a power failure occurs in the special gaming state according to the fourth embodiment and a memory abnormality occurs in power recovery.

At time t1, the first big hit (special game state) occurs and the big hit 1 signal and the big hit 2 signal are output as in the above-mentioned FIG. 81, and then the power failure occurs during the first big hit at time t21. When it occurs, the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off and the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are also turned off.

If a memory abnormality occurs in the RAM (here, RAM111c) when the power is restored and the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on at time t22, the output of the security signal is turned on. Specifically, when it is determined that the RAM abnormality flag is set in the main process (the result of A1022 is "Y"), the on-data of the security signal is output (A1026). On the other hand, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are turned off as signals other than the security signal (A1026). Further, while the processes of steps A1025 and A1026 are repeatedly waited and waited, the interrupt remains disabled (A1001), and the timer interrupt process capable of executing the special figure 1 and 2 game process and the normal figure game process. Since (Fig. 7) cannot be executed, the game (special figure variation display game, normal map variation display game) cannot be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent RAM abnormality from being reflected in the game.

The output state (on state) of the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal saved (stored) as save data (stored information) in the RAM at the time of a power failure is read by the power failure recovery process at the time of power recovery. Therefore, at the time of normal restoration, the big hit 1 signal and the big hit 2 signal can be output as shown by the broken line in FIG. However, since the RAM memory abnormality has occurred, the game control device 100 turns on the security signal as shown by the solid line in FIG. 83, while holding the jackpot 1 signal as shown by the broken line in FIG. 83. And the big hit 2 signal is not output.

After that, at time t23, when the power is turned off once and then turned on, it is determined that the setting key switch 93 (setting key) and the RAM initialization switch 112 are pressed (on) (the result of A1021 is). "Y"), the state shifts to the setting change state (setting change mode, setting variable state), the probability setting value is cleared due to a RAM error (A1028), and the security signal is turned on (A1034). Then, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off (the result of A1036 is "Y") and the setting change state ends, 0 clear (RAM clear) of the RAM area other than the probability set value is performed (A1042), and initialization is performed. (A1043, A1044). Therefore, the security signal is turned off, and the held jackpot 1 signal and jackpot 2 signal are also turned off. Further, the memory abnormality of the gaming machine 10 is resolved. On the other hand, the jackpot state is also reset, the gaming machine 10 is in the normal gaming state, and the stop symbol is also out of alignment.

In addition, when a power failure occurs during the second big hit, a time saving state, or a probable change state, a memory abnormality occurs in the same manner, RAM is cleared and initialized, and the gaming machine 10 is in the normal gaming state. Become.

[Timing chart when shifting to the setting confirmation state after a power failure in the special game state]
With reference to FIG. 84, in the fourth embodiment, the timing of signal output and the like when a power failure occurs in the special gaming state, the power is restored to normal, and the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) is entered will be described. do. FIG. 84 is a timing chart showing an example of timing such as signal output when a power failure occurs in the special gaming state according to the fourth embodiment, the power is restored to normal, and the setting confirmation state is entered.

Similar to FIG. 81 described above at time t1, when the first big hit occurs and one big hit signal and two big hit signals are output, and then a power failure occurs during the first big hit at time t31, the gaming machine 10 When the power is turned off, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are also turned off.

At time t32, when the setting key switch 93 of the gaming machine 10 is turned on (RAM initialization switch 112 is off), the power is restored and the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the probability setting checking flag is set. (A1032), the gaming machine 10 shifts to a setting confirmation state in which the probability set value (set value) can be confirmed (A1305).

When the setting confirmation state is entered at time t32, a security signal is output as shown in FIG. 84 (A2406). On the other hand, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are turned off as signals other than the security signal, as shown by the solid line in FIG. 83 (A2406).

As described above in FIG. 83, the output states (on states) of the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are saved in the RAM during a power failure (A1057, A1058), and are also shown by broken lines in FIG. 84 when the power is restored. As described above, the save data relating to the output state (on state) of the big hit 1 signal and the big hit 2 signal is held.

Then, at time t33, the setting key switch 93 of the gaming machine 10 is turned off (the result of A1036 is “Y”), and when the power failure recovery process is performed (A1045), the security signal is turned off.

In addition, the output status of the jackpot 1 signal and jackpot 2 signal saved (stored) as save data (stored information) in the RAM at the time of a power failure is read by the power failure recovery process and turned on after the setting confirmation status is completed. Become. Therefore, when the setting confirmation state ends, the first big hit game is restarted. Then, the same number of rounds as the jackpot game (special game) during normal operation without a power failure is digested over the same time.

When the first jackpot ends at time t34, the output of the jackpot 1 signal is turned off. On the other hand, after the end of the first big hit, it is in a time saving state (normal electric support state) or a probability change state (specific game state, probability fluctuation state), and the output of the big hit 2 signal is maintained in the on state.

After that, the signal output after the occurrence of the second big hit from time t35 to time t36 is the same as the signal output from time t3 to time t5 described above in FIG. 81.

If a power failure occurs during the second big hit, time saving state, or probable change state, and the power is restored to the setting confirmation state, when the setting confirmation state ends, the game is played by the power failure recovery process (A1045) of the main process. The machine 10 is normally restored to the state before the power failure, and can resume the second big hit, the time saving state, or the probable change state.

[Timing chart when shifting to the setting change state after a power failure in the special game state]
With reference to FIG. 85, in the fourth embodiment, a power failure occurs in the special gaming state, and the signal output and the like when the power is restored to normal and the setting is changed to the setting change state (setting change mode, setting variable state) and the like. The timing of is explained. FIG. 85 is a timing chart showing an example of timing such as signal output when a power failure occurs in the special gaming state according to the fourth embodiment, the power is restored to normal, and the state shifts to the setting change state.

Similar to FIG. 81 described above at time t1, when the first big hit occurs and one big hit signal and two big hit signals are output, and then a power failure occurs during the first big hit at time t41, the gaming machine 10 When the power is turned off, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are also turned off.

At time t42, when the setting key switch 93 of the gaming machine 10 is turned on and the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed (on), the power is restored and the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the probability setting is changed. The middle flag is set (A1029), and the gaming machine 10 shifts to a setting change state in which the probability setting value (setting value) can be changed (A1305).

When the setting change state is entered at time t42, a security signal is output as shown in FIG. 85 (A2406). On the other hand, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are turned off as signals other than the security signal, as shown by the solid line in FIG. 85 (A2406).

As described above in FIG. 83, the output state (on state) of the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal is saved in the RAM at the time of power failure (A1057, A1058), and is also shown by the broken line in FIG. 85 at the time of power recovery. As described above, the save data relating to the output state (on state) of the big hit 1 signal and the big hit 2 signal is held.

Then, at time t43, when the setting key switch 93 of the gaming machine 10 is turned off (the result of A1036 is “Y”), the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A1040 is “Y”). ), 0 clear (RAM clear) of the RAM area other than the probability set value is performed (A1042), and the initialization is performed (A1043, A1044). Therefore, the security signal is turned off, and the held jackpot 1 signal and jackpot 2 signal are also turned off. Therefore, when the setting change state is completed, the gaming machine 10 is normally restored, but the jackpot state is reset by clearing the RAM, and the gaming machine 10 is in the normal gaming state, and the stop symbol is also out of alignment.

Even if a power failure occurs during the second big hit, time saving state, or probability change state, the RAM is cleared and initialized when the setting change state is completed, and the gaming machine 10 is in the normal gaming state. Will be.

[Timing chart when the power is turned off in the setting change state after a power failure in the special game state]
With reference to FIG. 86, in the fourth embodiment, a power failure occurs in the special gaming state, the power is restored normally by the power recovery, and the power is turned off after shifting to the setting change state (setting change mode, setting variable state). The timing of signal output and the like when the power is set to is described. FIG. 86 is an example of the timing of signal output and the like when a power failure occurs in the special gaming state according to the fourth embodiment, the power is restored to normal, the setting is changed, and then the power is turned off. It is a timing chart showing.

The signal output when a power failure occurs from the occurrence of the first big hit from time t1 to time t52 and the power is restored in the setting change state is the same as the signal output from time t1 to time t42 described above in FIG. 85. At time t52, when shifting to the setting change state, the probability setting changing flag is set as in the case of time t42 in FIG. 85 (A1029).

After that, at time t53, when the power is turned off (or when the power failure occurs again) in the setting change state, the output of the security signal is turned off. As shown by the broken line in FIG. 85, the save data regarding the output state (on state) of the big hit 1 signal and the big hit 2 signal is held as in the broken line up to FIG. 84. Further, since the save data saved in the RAM cannot be read when the power is turned off, the broken lines of the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal when the power is turned off are turned off. The probability setting changing flag remains set (the result of A1037 is "Y", A1057, A1058).

At time t54, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is not turned on (the result of A1021 is "N") and the power is turned on, the probability setting changing flag is set (A1023). The result is "Y"), and the on-data of the security signal is output (A1026). On the other hand, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are turned off as signals other than the security signal, as shown by the solid line in FIG. 86 (A1026). Therefore, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are held in the RAM as save data in the output state (on state) as shown by the broken line in FIG. 86, but are not output. Further, since the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) cannot be executed while the processes of steps A1025 and A1026 are repeatedly waited and waited, the game (special figure variation display game, normal figure variation display game) cannot be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unexpected processing (processing in which a power is restored due to a power failure in the setting change state) from being reflected in the game. After that, by clearing the RAM (A1042) at the same time as the time t23 in FIG. 83, the normal recovery can be performed, and at that time, the jackpot state is reset.

[Action / effect of the fourth embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result (stop result) of the game (for example, the special figure variable display game, the variable display game) becomes a special result (big hit result). A control means (game control device 100) capable of generating (big hit game state) is provided. The gaming machine 10 includes holding and storing means (RAM of the gaming control device 100) that stores information about the game and can store and retain the stored information even if a power failure occurs. The control means can output a signal (1 big hit signal) triggered by the occurrence of a special gaming state, and is held during the restart process when the power is restored after a power failure occurs during the occurrence of the special gaming state. When an abnormality in the information recorded in the storage means is detected, a security signal for notifying the abnormality is output, and a signal (one jackpot signal) is not output.

According to such a gaming machine 10, when an abnormality in the information recorded in the holding and storing means is detected during the restart process when the power is restored after the power failure occurs during the occurrence of the special gaming state. Does not output a signal (one jackpot signal) that is output when a special gaming state occurs, but outputs a security signal. Therefore, when the power is restored, it is possible to notify that the gaming machine has been fraudulent. .. By notifying fraud, the person in charge of the amusement park (game store) can take measures against fraud.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment includes setting changing means (game control device 100, setting key switch 93, RAM initialization switch 112) capable of changing setting values (probability setting values) related to gaming conditions. The control means (game control device 100) can output a signal (big hit 1 signal) when a special game state (big hit game state) occurs, and a set value after a power failure occurs during the occurrence of the special game state. Outputs a security signal to notify the abnormality during the restart process when the power is restored due to a power failure in the changeable setting change state (setting change mode, setting variable state), and a signal (1 jackpot signal) Does not output.

According to such a gaming machine 10, a signal (one jackpot signal) output when a special gaming state occurs is not output during the restart process when a power failure occurs and the power is restored in the setting change state. Since the security signal is output, it is possible to notify the gaming machine that unexpected processing is being performed in the setting change state. By this notification, the person in charge of the game hall (game store) can take a response to the fact that an unexpected process (a process of power failure and restoration in the setting change state) is performed on the game machine.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is specially advantageous to the player when the result (stop result) of the game (for example, the special figure variable display game, the variable display game) becomes a special result (big hit result). A control means (game control device 100) capable of generating a game state (big hit game state) and a specific game state (time saving state, probability change state) is provided. The gaming machine 10 includes holding and storing means (RAM of the gaming control device 100) that stores information about the game and can store and retain the stored information even if a power failure occurs. The control means can start outputting a signal (two big hit signals) when the special gaming state occurs, and can output the signal until the specific gaming state after the special gaming state ends, and can output the special gaming state or the specific gaming state. If an abnormality in the information recorded in the retention storage means is detected during the restart process when the power is restored after a power failure occurs during the occurrence of the state, a security signal for notifying the abnormality is sent. Output and do not output signals (big hit 2 signals).

According to such a gaming machine 10, after a power failure occurs during the occurrence of a special gaming state or a specific gaming state, an abnormality in the information recorded in the holding storage means is detected during the restart process when the power is restored. If it is detected, the signal (2 jackpot signals) that is output when the special gaming state occurs is not output, but the security signal is output. Therefore, when the power is restored, the gaming machine is fraudulent. It can be notified that. By notifying fraud, the person in charge of the amusement park (game store) can take measures against fraud.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment includes setting changing means (game control device 100, setting key switch 93, RAM initialization switch 112) capable of changing setting values (probability setting values) related to gaming conditions. The control means (game control device 100) can start outputting signals (big hit 2 signals) when a special game state (big hit game state) occurs, and the specific game state (time saving state, probability change state) after the special game state. The signal can be output until the end of, and after a power failure occurs during the occurrence of the special game state or the specific game state, a power failure occurs in the setting change state (setting change mode, setting variable state) in which the setting value can be changed. During the restart process when the power is restored, a security signal for notifying an abnormality is output, and no signal (2 jackpot signals) is output.

According to such a gaming machine 10, the signal (big hit 2 signal) output when the special gaming state occurs is not output during the restart process when the power is restored due to a power failure in the setting change state. Since the security signal is output, it is possible to notify the gaming machine that unexpected processing is being performed in the setting change state. By this notification, the person in charge of the game hall (game store) can take a response to the fact that an unexpected process (a process of power failure and restoration in the setting change state) is performed on the game machine.

[Fifth Embodiment]
A fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 97. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to fourth embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to fourth embodiments, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted as appropriate. The fifth embodiment relates to the generation of a symbol fixed number signal as external information.

[Game board]
87-89 is a front view of the game board 30 according to the fifth embodiment. In the game board 30 according to the fifth embodiment, unlike the first embodiment (FIG. 2), in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, in order from the top, the flow path unit 802, the large winning opening unit 800, and the Fuden A unit 804 and a large winning opening unit 806 are provided. It should be noted that FIGS. 87 and 88 show the game board in such a manner that the inside of the flow path unit 802, the large winning opening unit 800, the general electric unit 804, and the large winning opening unit 806 is seen through without showing the substantially transparent front cover. 30 is shown, but FIG. 89 shows a substantially transparent anterior lid.

The flow path unit 802 forms a flow path including the normal drawing start gate 34, and causes the game ball to flow down to the large winning opening unit 800 regardless of whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34. ..

The large winning opening unit 800 is a combination of a general winning opening 35, a special variable winning device 39 (large winning opening solenoid 39b, opening / closing door 39c (blade member)), a specific area 86, and the like. In the large winning opening unit 800, the game ball flowing down from the flow path unit 802 wins a prize in the general winning opening 35, or flows down the left and right flow paths 800a and 800b leading to the special variable winning device 39. Here, the special variable winning device 39 is normally closed, and the game ball flowing down the flow path 800c where the left and right flow paths 800a and 800b merge flows down to the general electric unit 804. However, when the result mode of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a special result (for example, a big hit), the game ball is opened for a predetermined time and the game ball is in a state where it can win a prize in the special variable winning device 39, and further predetermined. It is possible to win a prize in the specific area 86 with the probability of. For example, the special variable winning device 39 may be opened only in the case of a big hit.

The Fuden unit 804 forms a flow path 804a including a normal variable winning device 37 and a general winning opening 35, and a big prize is given to a game ball that has not flowed into the normal variable winning device 37 or the general winning opening 35. Let it flow down to the mouth unit 806. Here, the ordinary variable winning device 37 includes a movable member (movable piece) 37b that slides and retracts to convert the game ball into a state in which it can easily flow in.

In addition, unlike the first embodiment, the ordinary variable winning device 37 is provided with a first starting winning opening (starting opening 1, first starting winning area), and is the same as the winning to the starting winning opening 36, the ordinary variable winning device 37. The winning prize is detected by the starting port 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3). That is, in the present embodiment, the first starting winning opening (starting opening 1, first starting winning area) in which the starting condition of the special figure 1 variable display game is satisfied by the winning (winning) of the game ball is the starting winning opening. There are two, 36 and the normal variable winning device 37. Further, the starting port 1 switch 36a also exists at two locations, the starting winning port 36 and the normal variable winning device 37. Therefore, the game ball that has won the ordinary variable prize device 37 is detected as the start winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game, and can be stored as the first start memory (special figure 1 start memory, special figure 1 hold).

The large winning opening unit 806 includes a second starting winning opening 820 (starting opening 2, second starting winning area), a general winning opening 35, and a special variable winning device 38 (large winning opening solenoid 38b, sliding opening / closing door 38c). The flow path 806a including the above is formed. The game ball that has not won the second starting winning opening 820 and the special variable winning device 38 flows down to the downstream general winning opening 35 or the out opening 30b directly below the starting winning opening 36. Here, the special variable winning device 38 is normally closed, and the game ball does not win. However, when the result mode of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a special result (for example, a small hit), the game ball is opened for a predetermined time and the game ball is in a state where the special variable winning device 38 can win a prize. For example, the special variable winning device 38 may be opened only in the case of a small hit.

The second start winning opening 820 (starting opening 2, second starting winning area) does not have an opening / closing member (movable member) and is always in an open state. The second starting winning opening 820 is detected by the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3), unlike the winning to the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37. Therefore, the game ball that has won the second start winning opening 820 is detected as the start winning ball of the special figure 2 variable display game, and can be stored as the second start memory (special figure 2 start memory, special figure 2 hold). .. That is, in the present embodiment, the second start winning opening 820 (starting opening 2, second starting winning area) is satisfied with the starting condition of the special figure 2 variable display game by the winning (winning) of the game ball.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the lamp display device 80 is provided in the upper right portion of the center case 40. The batch display device 50 is provided in the general winning opening unit 808 arranged in the game area 32 at the lower left of the center case 40. The general winning opening unit 808 includes a plurality of general winning opening 35 and an out opening 30b.

An upper left effect unit 40f, an upper effect unit 40 g, an upper right effect unit 40h, a lower effect unit 40i, and a lower right effect unit 40j are provided on the upper left portion, the upper portion, the upper right portion, the lower portion, and the lower right portion of the center case 40, respectively. These effect units form a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 4).

The upper left effect unit 40f provided in the upper left portion of the center case 40 includes an operable movable member and a light emitting member (LED or the like). The movable member 621 of the upper left effect unit 44f has a substantially elliptical hemisphere, and can move from the initial position shown in FIG. 87 toward the center of the display device 41 to move to the operating position shown in FIG. 88. ..

The movable member 621 is slidable so that the right half portion 622, which is a central portion of the display device 41, is separated from the left half portion 623. In the state shown in FIG. 87, the right half portion 622 and the left half portion 623 are in close contact with each other, and in the state shown in FIG. 88, the right half portion 622 and the left half portion 623 are separated from each other. As shown in FIG. 88, when the right half portion 622 and the left half portion 623 are separated from each other, the light emitting portion 624 can be visually recognized from between the right half portion 622 and the left half portion 623, and it is possible to show linear light emission. It has become. It should be noted that this linear light emission is arranged in a line with the linear light emitting unit 640 provided in the upper right effect unit 40h, and it is possible to perform an integrated light emission effect. Further, the right half portion 622 and the left half portion 623 are also made of a material capable of transmitting light, and it is possible to produce an effect by emitting light from a light emitting member arranged at the rear.

The upper effect unit 40g provided in the center of the upper part of the center case 40 includes an operable movable member and a light emitting member (LED or the like). The movable member 650 (movable body, predetermined accessory) of the upper effect unit 40 g can move from the initial position shown in FIG. 87 toward the center of the display device 41 and move to the operating position shown in FIG. 89. Is. It is also possible to rotate around an axis along the front-back direction. The movable member 650 is equipped with a light emitting member (LED or the like) for emitting a logo provided as a decoration on the movable member 650.

The movable member 650 (predetermined accessory) of the upper effect unit 40 g is provided with a movable relay board, motors M1 and M2 (driven unit, effect unit), and a logo board. The movable member 650 operates (moves, rotates) by driving the motors M1 and M2. The motors M1 and M2 are driven and controlled based on a control signal transmitted from the panel effect movable body control circuit 334 via the movable relay board.

For example, when the motor M1 is driven, a circular gear (pinion) attached to the motor shaft of the motor M1 meshes with a linear gear (rack) fixed to the game board 30 to rotate, thereby rotating the movable member 650. The whole of can be moved from the initial position (FIG. 87) to the operating position (FIG. 89). For example, when the motor M2 is driven, the rotatable rotating portion of the movable member 650 can rotate together with the motor shaft (axis along the front-rear direction) of the motor M2 to which the rotating portion is attached. ..

The upper right effect unit 40h provided in the upper right part of the center case 40 includes a linear light emitting unit 640 equipped with LEDs and the like, and light emitting units 641 provided on both sides of the light emitting unit 640, and can produce effects by light emission. It has become. The lower right effect unit 40j provided in the lower right portion of the center case 40 is also provided with a light emitting member (LED or the like), and can produce a light emitting effect. Further, the lower effect unit 40i provided at the lower part of the center case 40 includes an movable movable member 670 and a light emitting member (LED or the like) that can be operated. The movable member 670 operates from the initial position on the lower left side of the center case 40 shown in FIG. 87 toward the center of the display device 41, and is a position where the lower right effect unit 40j is provided as shown in FIG. 88. It is movable to the operating position (it can rotate around the axis).

As shown in FIG. 88, when both the movable member 670 and the movable member 621 move to the operating position, the out-of-order symbol displayed on the display device 41 during temporary stop (during shaking fluctuation) is destroyed, resulting in a big hit. An effect that changes into a pattern may be executed.

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
FIG. 90 is a game state transition diagram (game flow) illustrating the transition of the game state in the fifth embodiment. The game state is transitioned (shifted) by the game control of the game control device 100. In FIG. 90, the gaming state is particularly shown to be a transition triggered by the occurrence of a big hit or a transition triggered by the passage of a predetermined number of games (rotational speed, number of fluctuations).

In the fifth embodiment, the gaming states include a normal gaming state, a specific gaming state A, specific gaming states B1 and B2, and a specific gaming state C. The specific gaming states A and the specific gaming states B1 and B2 are probabilistic states, and the jackpot probability is a high probability state. Further, the specific game state C is a time saving state. In FIG. 90, features such as a jackpot probability state, the presence / absence of a normal electric support, an effect mode, a main starting area, a main variation display game, and a launch mode are shown for each game state. Since the specific gaming state B1 and the specific gaming state B2 differ only in the effect mode (effect mode) and have the same other features, they may be collectively referred to as the specific game state B.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variation display game (first variation display game) based on the establishment of the first start condition (for example, winning a prize in the first start winning opening), and the second start condition. Execute the special figure 2 variable display game (second variable display game) based on the establishment (for example, winning the second start winning opening), and execute both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. It can be in the middle state. Then, depending on the game state, one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is defined as the main variable display game. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity, the main variable display game is referred to as a "main variable display game", and the non-main variable display game is referred to as a "subordinate variable display game".

In the present embodiment, the main variable display game (main variable display game) is the one that is frequently executed among the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, and is a secondary variable display game (mainly). The variable display game) is the one that is not frequently executed among the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. In the present embodiment, the game control device 100 can make the main variation display game run more frequently than the slave variation display game by lengthening the variation time of the slave variation display game to make it a long variation. Further, in the present embodiment, the main variation display game is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the main starting area (main area, main starting winning opening) where the game ball often enters, and the secondary variation display is performed. The game is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the sub-starting area (subordinate area, sub-starting winning opening) where the game ball is less likely to enter than the main starting area.

In addition, the jackpot is a regular jackpot (normal jackpot) in which a jackpot state is generated by the jackpot result (first special result) of the main fluctuation display game, and a jackpot state is determined by the jackpot result (first special result) of the dependent fluctuation display game. There is an irregular jackpot (abnormal jackpot) that occurs. In addition, the small hits include a regular small hit (normal small hit) in which a small hit state is generated by the small hit result (second special result) of the main fluctuation display game, and a small hit result (second special result) of the secondary fluctuation display game. There is an irregular small hit (abnormal small hit) in which a small hit state occurs depending on the result).

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, there is no small hit result in the special figure 1 variable display game, and there is a small hit result (small hit B) only in the special figure 2 variable display game. However, as an option, a small hit result may be provided in the special figure 1 variable display game (small hit A). In this case, in the special figure 1 game process (FIG. 14), a small hit fanfare middle process, a small hit middle process, a small hit remaining ball process, and a special figure 1 small hit end process are provided, and a special figure 1 variable display game is provided. If is a small hit result, the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set, and the special figure 2 variation display game is interrupted by interrupting the measurement of the fluctuation time by the special figure 2 game processing timer. In addition, the lower large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is opened by a small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game. Further, the small hit probability of the special figure 1 variable display game is made considerably smaller than the small hit probability of the special figure 2 variable display game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot symbol type (big hit type) is a 10R probability variation jackpot symbol AE (10R probability variation jackpot AE) and a 10R normal jackpot symbol (10R normal jackpot). The ratio of jackpot symbol types (distribution of jackpots) is 5% for 10R probability variation jackpot symbol A (10R probability variation A), 46% for 10R probability variation jackpot symbol B (10R probability variation B), and 10R for the special figure 1 variable display game. The normal jackpot symbol (10R normal) is 49%. Regarding the special figure 2 variable display game, the 10R probability variation jackpot symbol C (10R probability variation C) is 26%, the 10R probability variation jackpot symbol D (10R probability variation D) is 49%, and the 10R probability variation jackpot symbol E (10R probability variation E) is 25%. be.

First, each game state will be described. In the normal game state, the game control device 100 sets the jackpot probability to a low probability and controls so that there is no general electric support (electric support).

Further, in the normal gaming state, the effect mode is the normal mode. In addition, the display device 41 in the jackpot state executes a battle effect in which the ally character and the enemy character play against each other, but in the normal mode, the display device 41 performs the effect until the ally character and the enemy character meet. Will be executed.

Further, in the normal gaming state, the left-handed hitting that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 36 is more advantageous for the player than the right-handed hitting, and is recommended as a launching mode of the game ball. The main starting area is the first starting winning opening 36, and the main variation display game (main variation special figure) is the special figure 1 variation display game. The slave start area is the second start winning opening 820, and the slave variation display game is the special figure 2 variation display game. As described above, in the normal gaming state, the slave variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) is a long-term variation (long variation, for example, a variation time of 10 minutes).

In the specific game state A (probability change state A), the game control device 100 sets the jackpot probability to a high probability and controls so that there is no general electric support (electric support). As described in FIG. 30, the specific game state A is a small hit rush state (small hit) in which small hits are frequently generated by the special figure 2 fluctuation display game of short fluctuations and a large amount of game value (prize ball) is obtained by the small hits. It becomes a hit RUSH state). Therefore, in the specific gaming state A, right-handed striking aiming at the second starting winning opening 820 is recommended as the launch mode of the gaming ball. Therefore, in the specific gaming state A, the main start area is the second start winning opening 820 and the slave start area is the first start winning opening 36. Therefore, the main variation display game is the special figure 2 variation display game, and the slave variation display. The game is a special figure 1 variable display game.

Further, in the specific game state A, the effect mode is the twin battle mode A. In the twin battle mode A, before the battle effect during the big hit state, the effect that the ally character is chased by the enemy character, that is, the effect that leads to the battle effect is executed on the display device 41.

In the specific game state B (specific game states B1, B2, probability variation state B), the game control device 100 sets the jackpot probability to a high probability and controls so that there is a general electric support. Therefore, in the specific gaming state B, right-handed striking aiming at the normal variable winning device 37 is recommended as the launch mode of the gaming ball. In addition, in the game board 30 (FIG. 87) of the present embodiment, when there is a general electric support, most of the game balls flow into the normal variable winning device 37 by right-handed hitting. For this reason, the game ball hardly flows into the second starting winning opening 820 or the lower large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) that is opened by a small hit, so that the small hit rush is achieved in the specific gaming state B. It does not become a state. In the specific game state B, when hitting to the right, the main starting area becomes the normal variable winning device 37 and the secondary starting area becomes the second starting winning opening 820. Therefore, the main variable display game becomes the special figure 1 variable display game, and the secondary variation The display game is a special figure 2 variable display game.

Further, the effect modes of the specific game states B1 and B2 are the twin battle modes B1 and B2. Similar to the twin battle mode A, in the twin battle modes B1 and B2, the effect that the ally character is chased by the enemy character before the battle effect in the big hit state, that is, the effect that leads to the battle effect is executed. The background and the like displayed on the display device 41 may be different between the twin battle modes B1 and B2 and the twin battle mode A. Further, there is a difference in production between the twin battle mode B1 and the twin battle mode B2, such as whether the main character displayed on the display device 41 is a ally character or an enemy character.

In the specific game state C (time saving state), the game control device 100 sets the jackpot probability to a low probability and controls so that there is a normal electric support. Therefore, in the specific gaming state C, right-handed striking is recommended as the launch mode of the gaming ball. Then, as in the specific gaming state B, in the specific gaming state C, the main starting area becomes the normal variable winning device 37, the secondary starting area becomes the second starting winning opening 820, and the main variable display game becomes the special figure 1 variable display game. , The subordinate variable display game is a special figure 2 variable display game.

Further, the effect mode of the specific game state C is the rescue mode. In the rescue mode, the display device 41 executes an effect that expects the defeated ally character to be revived in the battle effect during the big hit state.

Next, the transition (transition) from each gaming state will be described. In the normal game state, when the special figure 1 variable display game (main variable display game) generates 10R probability variable big hits A and B, the game shifts to the specific game state A after the big hit state ends, and when the 10R normal big hit occurs, the big hit state. After the end of, the game shifts to the specific game state C. In the normal game state, when the 10R probability variable big hit C-E is generated by the special figure 2 variable display game (subordinate variable display game), the game shifts to the specific game state A after the end of the big hit state, and when the 10R normal big hit occurs, the big hit state. After the end of, the game shifts to the specific game state B1.

As described above, as the effect during the big hit state, the battle effect in which the enemy and the ally character play against each other is executed on the display device 41. In the case of 10R probability variation jackpot A, the ally character wins in the battle production, but the production that definitely suggests that the ally character wins from the first round (for example, 1 to 3 rounds) is executed. (Victory bonus). In the case of 10R probability change jackpot B, the ally character wins in the battle production (battle bonus victory). In the case of a 10R normal jackpot, a friendly character is defeated in the battle production (battle bonus defeat). Also, in the case of the 10R probability change jackpot CE, the ally character is defeated in the battle production (battle bonus defeat).

After the end of the big hit state, if there is a V prize (passing the game ball to the specific area 86) in a specific round (for example, 9 rounds) in the big hit state, the state shifts to the probable change state, and if there is no V prize, the probable change state. It shifts to another game state other than (here, the time saving state). In the specific round or the round immediately before or after the specific round, the result of victory or defeat in the battle effect may be displayed. On the other hand, after the end of the small hit state (shorter time than the big hit state), the game returns to the original gaming state before the start of the small hit state. Although the jackpot probability is low during the jackpot state, the jackpot probability before the start of the small hit state is maintained during the small hit state (the probability state changes during the small hit state and before and after the small hit state). do not do).

In the specific game state A, when 10R probability variation big hits A and B are generated by the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (subordinate fluctuation display game), the game returns to the specific game state A after the end of the big hit state, and when the 10R normal big hit occurs, the big hit state. After the end of, the game shifts to the specific game state C. In the specific game state A, when the special figure 2 variation display game (main variation display game) generates 10R probability variation big hits C and E, the game returns to the specific game state A after the end of the jackpot state, and when the 10R probability variation jackpot D occurs, the jackpot After the end of the state, the game shifts to the specific game state B1. The small hit rush state in which small hits occur frequently and a large amount of game value (prize ball) is obtained by small hits continues during the specific game state A, and the big hit probability is high throughout the small hit rush state (probability change state). Is maintained at.

Strictly speaking, the specific game state A continues until 2000 times (predetermined number of times) of the special figure variation display game is executed (ST), but since 2000 times is very large, it is practically. Continue until the next big hit occurs. If the fall lottery is won or the special figure variation display game is executed more than 2000 times, the game shifts to the normal game state. The number of executions of the special figure variation display game is the total number of executions of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game.

In the specific game state A, the contents of the battle effect in the case of the 10R probability variation big hits A and B and the 10R normal big hits are as described above. In the case of 10R probability change jackpot C, the ally character wins in the battle production (battle bonus victory). In the case of 10R probability change jackpot D, the ally character is defeated in the battle production (battle bonus defeat). Further, in the case of the 10R probability variation jackpot E, the ally character wins in the battle production, but from the first round, a production that definitely suggests that the ally character wins in the battle production is executed (). Victory bonus).

In the specific game state B1, when 10R probability variation big hits A and B are generated by the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (main fluctuation display game), the game shifts to the specific game state A again after the end of the big hit state, and when the 10R normal big hit occurs, After the end of the big hit state, the game shifts to the specific game state C. When the 10R probability variation jackpot CE is generated by the special figure 2 variation display game (subordinate variation display game) in the specific gaming state B1, the game returns to the specific gaming state B1 after the jackpot state ends.

The specific game state B1 shifts to the specific game state B2 when the number of times the special figure variation display game is executed in the specific game state B1 exceeds 100 times. If you win the fall lottery, you will be in the normal game state.

In the specific game state B2, when the 10R probability variation big hits A and B are generated by the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (main fluctuation display game), the game shifts to the specific game state A again after the end of the big hit state, and when the 10R normal big hit occurs, After the end of the big hit state, the game shifts to the specific game state C. In the specific gaming state B2, when the 10R probability variation jackpot CE is generated by the special figure 2 variation display game (subordinate variation display game), the game returns to the specific gaming state B1 after the jackpot state ends.

Strictly speaking, the specific game state B2 continues until the special figure variation display game is executed 3000 times (ST), but since 3000 times is very large, the next big hit is practically. Continue until it occurs. If the player wins the fall lottery or the number of times the special figure variation display game is executed exceeds 3000 times, the game shifts to the normal game state.

In the specific game state C, when the 10R probability variation big hits A and B are generated by the special figure 1 variable display game (main variable display game), the game shifts to the specific game state A again after the end of the big hit state, and when the 10R normal big hit occurs, After the jackpot state ends, the game returns to the specific game state C. In the specific game state C, when the 10R probability variation jackpot CE is generated by the special figure 2 variation display game (subordinate variation display game), the game returns to the specific game state B1 after the jackpot state ends.

In addition, when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the transition from the specific gaming state C to the normal gaming state is performed. For example, this predetermined transition condition is that (i) the number of times of executing the special figure 1 variable display game in the specific game state C exceeds 50 times (first predetermined number of times), and (ii) the special game state C. Either that the total number of executions of the figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game and special figure 2 variation display game) exceeds 100 times (second predetermined number of times larger than the first predetermined number of times) is established. That is. That is, in the specific game state C, when the number of executions of the special figure 1 variation display game exceeds 50 times, or the total number of executions of the special figure variation display game exceeds 100 times, the normal game state is entered. do.

In the specific game state C, it is the original specification (performance) of the gaming machine 10 that the special figure 1 variable display game, which is the main variable display game, can be executed 50 times. Assuming that the transition condition to the normal gaming state is only that the number of executions exceeds 50 times, the original specifications of the gaming machine 10 are deviated from the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game, which is a secondary variable display game. However, by providing the two conditions (i) and (ii), the execution portion of the dependent fluctuation display game can be treated as an extra (privilege), and the game can be played with the original specifications without causing any loss to the player. If the player plays normally, it is unlikely that the condition (i) will be satisfied and the normal gaming state will be entered.

As described above, in the specific gaming states A-C, the conditions for transitioning to another gaming state include the occurrence of a big hit (first transition condition) and other conditions (second transition condition, winning or predetermined fall lottery). There is a special figure variation display game execution of the number of times).

As shown by the thick line in FIG. 90, there is a high possibility that the specific game state A → the specific game state B → the specific game state A → the specific game state B → ... It is called a twin loop of probabilistic states A and B (probability change double loop). In the twin loop, the combination (pair) of the specific gaming state A and the specific gaming state B (B1, B2) occurs at least once. The twin loop often ends with the occurrence of a 10R normal jackpot, and when the 10R probability variation jackpots A and B occur in the normal gaming state, the player can obtain the benefits of the twin loop and the time saving state (specific gaming state C). Probability is high. As a result, the interest of the game is greatly enhanced.

In order to execute the transition of the gaming state as described above, in the present embodiment, for example, in step A6804 of the jackpot end setting process 3 (FIG. 44), the special figure high probability is not the special figure high probability & the time saving flag, but the special figure high probability. Only the flag is saved and steps A6801 to A6803 are omitted. In this way, if the determination result of step A6104 is "Y" after step A6102 of FIG. 40, or the determination result of step A6204 is "Y" after step A6202 of FIG. 41, after the jackpot ends. It shifts to the specific game state A (small hit rush state). If the determination result of step A6104 is "Y" after step A6103 of FIG. 40, or the determination result of step A6204 is "Y" after step A6203 of FIG. 41, the specific game state B1 ( After that, it shifts to the specific game state B2).

Further, if the determination result of step A6104 is "N" after step A6103 of FIG. 40, or if the determination result of step A6204 is "N" after step A6203 of FIG. It shifts to C (time saving state). In the present embodiment, it is not basically possible to directly shift to the normal gaming state after the end of the big hit, but to shift to the normal gaming state after passing through the specific gaming state C. Therefore, there is basically no route in which the determination result of step A6104 is "N" after step A6102 in FIG. 40 and the route in which the determination result of step A6204 is "N" after step A6202 in FIG. 41. .. However, even if the specific area 86 is opened, if the player does not intentionally pass the game ball through the specific area 86, such a route is obtained.

Further, in the present embodiment, even in the specific gaming states B and C other than the normal gaming state, the special figure 2 variable display game which is the dependent variable display game has a longer fluctuation than the special figure 1 variable display game which is the main variable display game ( In step A4501 of FIG. 30 (special figure 2 information setting process), whether or not the special figure has a low probability or a time reduction (during electric support) so as to have a long-term fluctuation and a long fluctuation time), that is, , It is determined whether or not it is a normal game state or a specific game state B or C. Then, when the special figure has a low probability or the time is shortened (with electric support) (the judgment result is "Y"), the process proceeds from A4505 to A4510, and the special figure 2 variable display, which is a dependent variable display game, is performed. Make the game volatile. In step A4402 of FIG. 29 (special figure 1 information setting process), in the specific game state A (high probability of special figure & no support), the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a dependent variable display game, is the main variable display game. The first half offset data and the second half offset data are acquired so as to have a longer fluctuation (longer fluctuation time) than that of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game.

[Special Figure 1 Processing during fluctuation]
FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process during the change in FIG. 1 according to the fifth embodiment. The same process as in FIG. 35 is assigned the same step number, and the description thereof will be omitted. In the fifth embodiment, there are two types of symbol confirmation count output counts: symbol confirmation count 1 output count and symbol confirmation count 2 output count.

First, the game control device 100 updates the number of symbol determinations by 1 and the number of outputs by +1 (increases by 1) (A5301a). As in the symbol confirmation number 1 signal editing process (FIG. 94A) described later, the symbol confirmation number 1 signal is output only once in response to the symbol confirmation number 1 output number being updated by +1. In this way, when the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variation display game is confirmed by lottery and stopped and displayed (immediately before), the symbol confirmation number 1 signal is output. The symbol confirmation count 1 signal is output from the external information terminal 71 to an external device such as a game hall internal management device (hall computer).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is currently in a state other than the special figure high probability & no support (other than the specific game state A) (A5301b). When the jackpot probability is low (low probability of special figure) or there is a general electric support (electric support) (the result of A5301b is "Y"), that is, when the normal gaming state or the specific gaming states B and C are present. The number of symbol confirmations 2 is updated by +1 (A5301c), and the process proceeds to step A5302. As in the symbol confirmation number 2 signal editing process (FIG. 94B) described later, the symbol confirmation number 2 signal (predetermined signal, predetermined type signal) corresponds to the fact that the symbol confirmation number 2 output number is updated by +1. It is output from the external information terminal 71 to an external device such as a game hall internal management device (hall computer) only once.

In this way, in the normal game state or the specific game states B and C, when the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the main variation display game, is confirmed by lottery and stopped and displayed, the symbol confirmation number 2 signal is external. It will be output to the device.

On the other hand, when the game control device 100 is in the state of high probability of special figure & no support (specific game state A) (the result of A5301b is "N"), the game control device 100 shifts to the process of step A5302 as it is.

In this way, in the specific game state A (small hit rush state) in which the jackpot probability is high (special figure high probability) and there is no general electric support (electric support), the main variable display game is the special figure 2 variable display game. Therefore, when the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable display game, which is the dependent variable display game, is confirmed by lottery and stopped and displayed, the symbol confirmation number 2 signal is not output.

If the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit and the special figure 2 is also changing during the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 display process is not being executed (step). When the determination of A5309 is "N"), the game control device 100 updates the number of symbol determinations by 1 and the number of outputs by +1 (increases by 1) (A5310a). In this way, when the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped (forced end) due to the hit result (big hit) of the special figure 1 variable display game, the symbol confirmation count 1 output count is updated by +1 and once. Only the number of times the symbol is confirmed 1 A signal is output to the external device.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is currently in the state of high probability of special figure & no support, that is, whether or not it is in the specific game state A (small hit rush state) (A5310b). .. When the special figure high probability & no support is in progress (specific game state A) (the result of A5310b is "Y"), the number of symbol confirmations 2 is updated by +1 (A5310c), and the process proceeds to step A5311. do. The symbol confirmation count 2 signal is output to the external device corresponding to the symbol confirmation count 2 output count being updated by +1.

In this way, in the specific game state A (small hit rush state), when the out-of-order stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable display game, which is the main variable display game, is confirmed and displayed by forced stop (forced termination), the symbol is displayed. The fixed number of times 2 signal will be output to the external device.

On the other hand, the game control device 100 shifts to the process of step A5311 as it is when it is not in the state of high probability of special figure & no support (specific game state A) (the result of A5310b is “N”).

In this way, the main variable display game is the special figure 1 variable display game in the normal game state or the specific game states B and C where the jackpot probability is low probability (special figure low probability) or there is a general electric support (electric support). Therefore, when the out-of-order stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable display game, which is the dependent variable display game, is confirmed and displayed by forced stop, the symbol confirmation number 2 signal is not output.

When the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, which is the main fluctuation display game, stops normally by the above special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the symbol confirmation count 2 output count is updated by +1 and the symbol confirmation count 2 signal is output. (A5301c). Further, when the special figure 2 variation display game, which is the main variation display game, is forcibly stopped (forced termination), the symbol confirmation number 2 output number is updated by +1 and the symbol confirmation number 2 signal is output (A5310c).

Note that normal stop (normal end) means stop (end) rather than forced stop (forced end). In the case of normal stop, the stop symbol corresponding to the lottery (big hit determination process, small hit determination process) is displayed, but in the case of forced stop, the missed stop symbol is displayed regardless of the lottery.

On the other hand, when the special figure 1 variable display game, which is the dependent variable display game, stops normally due to the special figure 1 changing process, or when the special figure 2 variable display game, which is the dependent variable display game, is forcibly stopped (forced termination). In addition, the symbol confirmation count 2 output count is not updated by +1 and the symbol confirmation count 2 signal is not output.

[Special Figure 2 Processing during fluctuation]
FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process during change in FIG. 2 according to the fifth embodiment. The same process as in FIG. 36 is assigned the same step number, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the game control device 100 updates the number of symbol determinations by 1 and the number of outputs by +1 (A5401a). The symbol confirmation count 1 signal is output only once in response to the symbol confirmation count 1 output count being updated by +1. In this way, when the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variation display game is confirmed by lottery and stopped and displayed (immediately before), the symbol confirmation number 1 signal is output to the external device.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is currently in the state of high probability and no support, that is, whether or not it is in the specific game state A (small hit rush state) (A5401b). .. When the jackpot probability is high (high probability of special figure) and there is no general electric support (electric support) (the result of A5401b is "Y"), the number of symbol confirmations 2 is updated by +1 (A5401c), and step A5402 Move to processing. The symbol confirmation count 2 signal is output to the external device only once in response to the symbol confirmation count 2 output count being updated by +1.

In this way, in the specific game state A (small hit rush state), when the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variation display game, which is the main variation display game, is confirmed by lottery and stopped and displayed (immediately before), the number of symbol confirmations is 2. The signal will be output to an external device.

On the other hand, the game control device 100 shifts to the process of step A5402 as it is when it is not in the state of high probability of special figure & no support (specific game state A) (the result of A5401b is “N”).

In this way, in the normal game state or the specific game states B and C, since the main variable display game is the special figure 1 variable display game, the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable display game, which is the dependent variable display game, is confirmed by lottery. When the stop display is displayed (immediately before), the symbol confirmation count 2 signal is not output.

If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit and the special figure 1 is also changing during the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1 display process is not being executed (step). The determination of A5410 is "N"), and the game control device 100 updates the number of symbol determinations by 1 and the number of outputs by +1 (A5411a). In this way, when the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped (forced termination) due to the hit result (big hit) of the special figure 2 variable display game, the symbol confirmation count 1 output count is updated by +1 and once. Only the number of times the symbol is confirmed 1 A signal is output to the external device.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is currently in a state other than the state of high probability of special figure & no support (A5310b). In cases other than the state of high probability of special figure & no support (the result of A5411b is "Y"), that is, in the normal game state or the specific game states B and C, the number of symbol confirmations 2 and the number of outputs are increased by +1. The update (A5411c) is performed, and the process proceeds to the process of step A5415. The symbol confirmation count 2 signal is output to the external device corresponding to the symbol confirmation count 2 output count being updated by +1.

In this way, in the normal game state or the specific game states B and C, when the missed stop symbol is confirmed and displayed due to the forced stop (forced termination) of the special figure 1 variable display game which is the main variable display game, the symbol is displayed. The fixed number of times 2 signal will be output to the external device.

On the other hand, when the game control device 100 is in the state of high probability of special figure & no support (specific game state A) (the result of A5411b is "N"), the game control device 100 shifts to the process of step A5415 as it is.

In this way, in the specific game state A (small hit rush state) in which the jackpot probability is high (special figure high probability) and there is no general electric support (electric support), the main variable display game is the special figure 2 variable display game. Therefore, when the out-of-order stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable display game, which is the dependent variable display game, is confirmed and displayed by forced stop, the symbol confirmation number 2 signal is not output.

When the special figure 2 variable display game, which is the main variable display game, stops normally (when it stops instead of the forced stop) by the above special figure 2 changing process, the symbol confirmation count 2 output count is updated by +1. The symbol confirmation count 2 signal is output to the external device (A5401c). Further, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, which is the main fluctuation display game, is forcibly stopped (forced termination), the symbol confirmation count 2 output count is updated by +1 and the symbol confirmation count 2 signal is output to the external device ( A5311c).

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 variable display game, which is the dependent variable display game, stops normally due to the special figure 2 changing process, or when the special figure 1 variable display game, which is the dependent variable display game, is forcibly stopped (forced termination). In addition, the symbol confirmation count 2 output count is not updated by +1 and the symbol confirmation count 2 signal is not output.

[External information editing process]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (A1321) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the external information editing process according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 93A shows the first half part of the external information editing process, and FIG. 93B shows the second half part of the external information editing process. In the external information editing process, information is based on the monitoring results of the payout command transmission process (A1307), winning opening switch / status monitoring process (A1310), magnet fraud monitoring process (A1317), and panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1318). It creates information to be output to an external device such as a collection terminal or amusement park internal management device (hall computer) or a test firing test device, and sets it in the output buffer.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not a glass frame opening error is occurring (A9501). When the glass frame opening error is not occurring (the result of A9501 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the main body frame opening error (front frame opening error) is occurring (A9502). When the main body frame opening error is not occurring (the result of A9502 is "N"), the off data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9503), and the off data of the security signal is the external information output data. Save to the area (A9504).

When the glass frame opening error is occurring (the result of A9501 is "Y") or the main body frame opening error is occurring (the result of A9502 is "Y"), the game control device 100 has a door. The on-data of the frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9505), and the on-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9506).

After steps A9504 and A9506, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the security signal control timer is not 0 (A9507), and determines whether or not the security signal control timer is 0 (whether or not the time is up). Judgment (A9508). A predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) is set as the initial value of the security signal control timer.

When the security signal control timer is not 0 (the result of A9508 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the on-data of the security signal in the external information output data area (A9509), and proceeds to the process of step A9510.

When the security signal control timer is 0 (the result of A9508 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not magnet fraud is occurring (A9510). When an abnormality is found in the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 in the magnet fraud monitoring process (A1317), it can be determined that magnet fraud is occurring. When the magnet fraud is not occurring (the result of A9510 is "N"), it is further determined whether or not the panel radio wave fraud is occurring (A9511). When an abnormality is found in the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 in the radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1318), it can be determined that the radio wave fraud is occurring.

When the board radio wave fraud is not occurring (the result of A9511 is "N"), the game control device 100 further determines whether or not the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (A9512). When the frame radio wave fraud signal is input to the game control device 100, it can be determined that the frame radio wave fraud is occurring. When the frame radio wave fraud is not occurring (the result of A9512 is "N"), it is further determined whether or not the large winning opening fraud is occurring (A9513). If the fraudulent prize occurrence flag for the large prize opening is saved in the fraud flag area by the fraud & prize monitoring process, it can be determined that the fraudulent prize opening is occurring. When the large winning opening fraud is not occurring (the result of A9513 is "N"), it is further determined whether or not the general electric fraud is occurring (A9514). If the fraudulent winning generation flag for the normal variable winning device 37 is saved in the fraudulent flag area by the fraudulent & winning monitoring process, it can be determined that the fraudulent electric power is being generated.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not vibration fraud is occurring when the general electric fraud is not occurring (the result of A9514 is "N") (A9515). When the ON signal from the vibration sensor 65 is detected in the vibration fraud monitoring process (A1319), it can be determined that vibration fraud is occurring. When vibration fraud is not occurring (the result of A9515 is "N"), it is further determined whether or not an abnormal discharge error is occurring (A9516). When the abnormal discharge occurring flag is set in the abnormal discharge monitoring process (A1320), it can be determined that an abnormal discharge error is occurring.

When the abnormal discharge error is not occurring (the result of A9516 is "N"), the game control device 100 further determines whether or not a V passage error is occurring (A9517). When the input to the specific area switch 72 is detected in the winning port switch / status monitoring process (A1310) during the period when the specific area switch 72 (V winning port switch) is not valid, it can be determined that a V passage error is occurring. .. When the result of the special figure variation display game is any of the 10R probability variation jackpots A and E, the specific area switch 72 is enabled in a specific round (for example, 9 rounds) during the jackpot state.

When the V-passing error is not occurring (the result of A9517 is "N"), the game control device 100 further determines whether or not a residual ball error is occurring (A9518). In the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (A1310), a remaining ball error is occurring when the game ball detected by the upper winning opening switch 39a is not detected by either the specific area switch 72 or the remaining ball ejection port switch 73. It can be determined that there is. When the remaining ball error is not occurring (the result of A9518 is "N"), it is further determined whether or not a switch abnormality error is occurring (A9519).

When a switch abnormality error (the above-mentioned switch abnormality 1 error) such as a switch connector disconnection is occurring (the result of A9519 is "N"), the game control device 100 tests off-data of the game machine error status signal. Save to the output data area (A9520). When a switch error is occurring (the result of A9519 is "Y"), the on-data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9522).

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the magnet fraud is occurring (the result of A9510 is "Y") and the panel radio fraud is occurring (the result of A9511 is "Y"), the frame radio fraud occurs. If it is inside (the result of A9512 is "Y"), if the big prize opening fraud is occurring (the result of A9513 is "Y"), or if the fraud is occurring (the result of A9514 is "Y"). ), When vibration fraud is occurring (A9515 result is "Y"), when an abnormal discharge error is occurring (A9516 result is "Y"), and when a V passage error is occurring (A9517). If the result of is "Y") or a residual ball error is occurring (the result of A9518 is "Y"), the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9521), and the game machine error occurs. The on-data of the status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9522). Depending on the on-data setting of the security signal, the security signal is output to an external device (such as a hall computer) as external information.

After steps A9520 and A9522, the game control device 100 executes a start port signal editing process for editing a winning signal of the start port (A9523). Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes a main prize ball signal editing process for setting information regarding the number of prize balls to be paid out (A9524).

Next, the game control device 100 has a symbol confirmation count 1 signal editing process (A9525) for editing and outputting the symbol confirmation count 1 signal, and a symbol confirmation count 2 signal for editing and outputting the symbol confirmation count 2. The signal editing process (A9526) is executed to end the external information editing process.

[Number of symbol confirmations 1 Signal editing process]
Next, the details of the symbol determination number 1 signal editing process (A9525) in the external information editing process (FIG. 93) will be described. FIG. 94A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the symbol determination number 1 signal editing process.

First, the game control device 100 updates -1 (subtracts only 1) if the symbol determination count 1 signal output control timer is not 0 (A9601). The minimum value of the symbol confirmation count 1 signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the symbol fixed number 1 signal output control timer is 0 (A9602).

When the value of the symbol confirmation count 1 signal output control timer is 0 (the result of A9602 is “Y”), the game control device 100 further determines whether or not the symbol confirmation count 1 signal output count is 0. Judgment (A9603).

Then, when the symbol confirmation count 1 signal output count is not 0 (the result of A9603 is "N"), the game control device 100 updates the symbol confirmation count 1 signal output count by -1 (subtracts only 1) ( A9604), the symbol confirmation count 1 signal output control timer initial value (for example, 556 msec) is saved in the symbol confirmation count 1 signal output control timer area (A9605).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the on-data for turning on the symbol fixed number 1 signal in the external information output data area of the RAM (A9607), and ends the symbol fixed number 1 signal editing process. When the number of symbol confirmations 1 signal is 0 (the result of A9603 is "Y"), the off-data for turning off the symbol confirmation number 1 signal for the external device is the external information output data area of the RAM. (A9608), the number of times the symbol is confirmed 1 and the signal editing process is completed.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, if the value of the symbol confirmation count 1 signal output control timer is not 0 (the result of A9602 is “N”), is the symbol confirmation count 1 signal output control timer in the output on section? It is determined whether or not (A9606). The fact that the symbol confirmation number 1 signal output control timer is in the output on section means that the value of the symbol confirmation number 1 signal output control timer is a predetermined time (for example, 300 msec) or more.

When the game control device 100 is in the output on section of the symbol confirmation count 1 signal output control timer (the result of A9606 is “Y”), the on-data for turning on the symbol confirmation count 1 signal is stored outside the RAM. Save in the information output data area (A9607). If the symbol confirmation count 1 signal output control timer is not in the output on section (the result of A9606 is "N"), the off data for turning off the symbol confirmation count 1 signal for the external device is the external information of the RAM. It is saved in the output data area (A9608), and the symbol determination count 1 signal editing process is completed.

In this way, when the number of symbol confirmations 1 and the number of signal outputs are updated by +1 (increased by 1) in the special figure 1 changing process (FIG. 91) and the special figure 2 changing process (FIG. 92), the number of symbol confirmations 1 After updating -1 (subtracting only 1) in the signal editing process, the number of symbol confirmations is 1 and the signal is turned on to generate the signal. Therefore, when the symbol confirmation count 1 output count is updated by +1 the symbol confirmation count 1 signal is output to the external device only once.

[Symbol confirmation count 2 signal editing process]
Next, the details of the symbol determination number 2 signal editing process (A9526) in the external information editing process (FIG. 93) will be described. FIG. 94B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the symbol determination number 2 signal editing process.

First, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the symbol determination count 2 signal output control timer is not 0 (A9701). The minimum value of the symbol confirmation count 2 signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the symbol determination number 2 signal output control timer is 0 (A9702).

When the value of the symbol confirmation count 2 signal output control timer is 0 (the result of A9702 is “Y”), the game control device 100 further determines whether or not the symbol confirmation count 2 signal output count is 0. Judgment (A9703).

Then, when the symbol confirmation count 2 signal output count is not 0 (the result of A9703 is “N”), the game control device 100 updates the symbol confirmation count 2 signal output count by -1 (A9704), and the symbol confirmation count 2 signal output count is updated by -1 (A9704). The number of times the symbol is confirmed in the 2 signal output control timer area 2 The initial value of the signal output control timer (for example, 556 msec) is saved (A9705).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the on-data for turning on the symbol fixed number 2 signal in the external information output data area of the RAM (A9707), and ends the symbol fixed number 2 signal editing process. Further, when the number of symbol confirmation count 2 signals is 0 (the result of A9703 is “Y”), the off data for turning off the symbol confirmation count 2 signal for the external device is stored in the external information output data area of the RAM. (A9708), the number of times the symbol is confirmed 2 and the signal editing process is completed.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, if the value of the symbol confirmation count 2 signal output control timer is not 0 (the result of A9702 is “N”), is the symbol confirmation count 2 signal output control timer in the output on section? It is determined whether or not (A9706). The fact that the symbol confirmation number 2 signal output control timer is in the output on section means that the value of the symbol confirmation number 2 signal output control timer is a predetermined time (for example, 300 msec) or more.

When the game control device 100 is in the output on section of the symbol confirmation count 2 signal output control timer (the result of A9706 is “Y”), the on-data for turning on the symbol confirmation count 2 signal is stored outside the RAM. Save in the information output data area (A9707). If the symbol confirmation count 2 signal output control timer is not in the output on section (the result of A9706 is "N"), the off data for turning off the symbol confirmation count 2 signal for the external device is the external information of the RAM. It is saved in the output data area (A9708), and the symbol determination count 2 signal editing process is completed.

In this way, when the number of symbol confirmations 2 and the number of signal outputs are updated by +1 (increase by 1) in the special figure 1 changing process (FIG. 91) and the special figure 2 changing process (FIG. 92), the number of symbol confirmations 2 After updating -1 (subtracting only 1) in the signal editing process, the symbol confirmation count 2 signal is turned on and generated. Therefore, when the symbol confirmation count 2 output count is updated by +1 the symbol confirmation count 2 signal is output to the external device only once.

As described above, as the symbol confirmation count signal, the symbol confirmation count 1 signal and the symbol confirmation count 2 signal are the special figure 1 changing process (FIG. 91), the special figure 2 changing process (FIG. 92), and external information editing. It is generated based on the processing (including FIG. 93, the symbol confirmation number 1 signal editing process (FIG. 94A) and the symbol confirmation number 2 signal editing process (FIG. 94B)). These symbol confirmation count signals are output to a data display (data display device, data display means) arranged as an external device in the vicinity above the game machine 10 in addition to the game hall internal management device (hall computer). It's okay.

As a result, the data display displays the number of games of all the special symbol variation display games based on the symbol confirmation count 1 signal, or displays only the number of games of the main variation display game based on the symbol confirmation count 2 signal. Can be selected by those involved in the amusement park. That is, the data display counts (counts) one symbol confirmation count 1 signal as +1 or counts one symbol confirmation count 2 signal as +1 and counts the count value as the number of games (rotation). It may be displayed as a number, the number of fluctuations, the number of executions). It should be noted that any of the symbol confirmation count signals may be counted by the game hall internal management device, and the count value may be transmitted to the data display to be displayed as the number of games.

In addition, in the amusement park internal management device (hall computer), the number of games of the secondary variable display game (almost long fluctuation) is obtained by subtracting the number of games of the main variable display game from the number of games of all the special figure variable display games. The number of games) can be acquired, and the number of games in the variable display game can be managed in the playground, such as monitoring whether the player is playing a game according to the hitting instruction display (right-handed instruction display or left-handed instruction display). Can be useful for.

[Generation of 1 signal for the number of symbol confirmations and 2 signal for the number of symbol confirmations]
FIG. 95 is a table summarizing the generation modes (generation status) of the symbol confirmation number 1 signal (a) and the symbol confirmation number 2 signal (b) in each gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 95 (a), the symbol fixed number 1 signal is a normal game state, a specific game state A (probability change state A, small hit rush state), a specific game state B (probability change state B), and a specific game state. In any of the game states of C (time saving state), it occurs when all the special figure variation display games are stopped (when stopped). That is, regardless of whether the game is a main variation display game or a slave variation display game, and whether the game is a normal stop or a forced stop, the symbol confirmation number 1 signal is the stop of the special figure variation display game. Occurs at the time.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 95 (b), the symbol confirmation number 2 signal is generated when the main variation display game is stopped in each game state, and is not generated when the slave variation display game is stopped. As described above, the symbol confirmation number 2 signal is a predetermined signal corresponding to the stop of the main variation display game (or the stop symbol of the main variation display game is confirmed) among the stops of the special figure variation display game. The symbol confirmation count 2 signal does not correspond to the stop of the dependent fluctuation display game. Here, in the normal game state, the specific game state B (probability change state B), and the specific game state C (time saving state), the main variable display game is the special figure 1 variable display game, and the secondary variable display game is the special figure. 2 This is a variable display game. Further, in the specific game state A (probability change state A, small hit rush state), the main variation display game is the special figure 2 variation display game, and the subordinate variation display game is the special figure 1 variation display game.

In addition, the main fluctuation display game is forcibly stopped (forced termination) only in the case of a big hit of the follow fluctuation display game, and further, since the player also has no profit such as long fluctuation, the follow fluctuation display game is played. Do not try to start (do not try to win a prize in the secondary start area). Therefore, the forced stop of the main variation display game rarely occurs, and the symbol confirmation count 1 signal and the symbol confirmation count 2 signal when the main variation display game is forcibly stopped rarely occur. Therefore, it can be practically ignored. Since the variable display game has a considerably longer fluctuation time than the main variable display game, it is often forcibly stopped as compared with the main variable display game, and the jackpot of the secondary variable display game hardly occurs. For this reason as well, it is very rare that the main variable display game is forcibly stopped. Further, unlike FIG. 92, the special figure fluctuation display game is forcibly stopped instead of being interrupted by a small hit of one of the special figure fluctuation display games and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. This will increase the chances that the follow-up variable display game will be forcibly stopped.

FIG. 96 is a time chart showing the generation mode of the symbol confirmation number 1 signal (a) and the symbol confirmation number 2 signal (b-1) (b-2).

As shown in FIG. 96A, if the symbol confirmation count 1 signal editing process (FIG. 94A) has a symbol confirmation count 1 signal output control timer initial value of 556 msec and the timer value is from 556 msec to 300 msec during the output on section. The symbol confirmation count 1 signal is turned on for 256 msec and turned off for 300 msec or more.

The symbol confirmation count 1 signal is generated when all the special figure variable display games are stopped (at the start of the stop period) regardless of whether the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped. .. If one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game stops due to a big hit result and the other is forcibly stopped due to a missed result (in the case of simultaneous stop), the two symbol confirmation count 1 signal is Since it cannot be transmitted at the same time, the symbol confirmation count 1 signal at the time of the other stop is transmitted at intervals (300 msec corresponding to the off state) from the symbol confirmation count 1 signal at the time of one stop.

As shown in FIGS. 96 (b-1) and 96 (b-2), the symbol confirmation count 2 signal editing process (FIG. 94B) symbol confirmation count 2 signal output control timer The initial value is 556 msec, and the timer value is in the output on section. If it is from 556 msec to 300 msec, the symbol confirmation number 2 signal is turned on for 256 msec and turned off for 300 msec or more.

As in (b-1), in the normal game state, the specific game state B (probability change state B), and the specific game state C (time saving state), the symbol confirmation number 2 signal is a special figure which is a main variation display game. 1 It is a signal generated when the variable display game is stopped and corresponding to the stop of the main variable display game. The symbol fixed number 2 signal is irrelevant to the fact that the special figure 2 variable display game, which is the dependent variable display game, has stopped. Even if one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game stops due to a big hit result and the other is forcibly stopped due to a missed result (in the case of simultaneous stop), the special figure 2 variable display game is the main variable display game. FIG. 1 The symbol confirmation count 2 signal is generated only when the variable display game is stopped.

As in (b-2), in the specific game state A (probability change state A, small hit rush state), the symbol confirmation number 2 signal is generated when the special figure 2 variation display game, which is the main variation display game, is stopped. Then, it becomes a signal corresponding to the stop of the main fluctuation display game. The symbol fixed number 2 signal is irrelevant to the fact that the special figure 1 variable display game, which is the dependent variable display game, has stopped. Even if one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game stops due to a big hit result and the other is forcibly stopped due to a missed result (in the case of simultaneous stop), the special figure 2 variable display game is the main variable display game. FIG. 2 The symbol confirmation count 2 signal is generated only when the variable display game is stopped.

In this way, the symbol confirmation count 2 signal is generated only when the main variation display game in each game state is stopped, and the count value of the symbol confirmation count 2 signal is displayed on the data display as the number of games. For example, the number of games of the special figure variation display game (main variation display game) can be displayed excluding the dependent variation display game. Therefore, the player does not feel uncomfortable, and the player's interest in the game is improved. In the display device 41, the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the main variable display game is displayed larger than the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the secondary variable display game, so that the player can display the main variable. Focus only on the game (it is difficult to recognize the start and end of the variable display game). Therefore, if the number of games of the special figure variable display game is displayed including the number of games of the secondary variable display game, the player feels uncomfortable.

Further, if the symbol confirmation count 2 signal is generated only when the main variation display game is stopped in each game state, the game hall internal management device (hall computer) or the like counts the symbol confirmation count 2 signal. Depending on the value, the number of games can be acquired in a form that almost excludes the special figure fluctuation display game that was forcibly stopped due to the result of the deviation. Since the number of games is substantially equal to the number of lottery by the big hit determination process in FIG. 23, the game hall internal management device and the like have the number of games (that is, the count value of the symbol confirmation number 2 signal) and the number of special prizes (that is, the number of special prizes). The actual measurement value of the probability of occurrence of a big hit can be accurately obtained from the number of occurrences of a big hit). In addition, since the special figure fluctuation display game forcibly stopped due to the loss result does not result in the loss result by the lottery (big hit determination process in FIG. 23), the actual measurement value of the big hit occurrence probability becomes inaccurate if it is included in the number of games. .. In addition, if the count value of the symbol confirmation count 2 signal is acquired for each game state, the actual measurement value of the jackpot occurrence probability (TS) in the low probability state and the actual measurement value of the jackpot occurrence probability (TSA) in the high probability state are obtained. You can find the value.

In addition, in order to acquire the number of games of the special figure fluctuation display game by the count value of the symbol confirmation count 2 signal in the form of completely excluding the special figure fluctuation display game that has been forcibly stopped, the main fluctuation display game is forcibly stopped. It is necessary to exclude the generation of the symbol confirmation number 2 signal in a rare case, but in such a case, the processing of steps A5310b and A5310c in FIG. 91 and the processing of steps A5311b and A5311c in FIG. 92 may be deleted. ..

〔Screen transition〕
FIG. 97 is an example of a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order. Here, a case where a regular big hit (normal big hit) occurs from the specific game state A (small hit rush state) is shown during the consecutive villas. In addition, the consecutive villa means that big hits occur continuously without going through the normal game state.

In FIG. 97 (E1), in the specific game state A, the special figure 2 variable display game, which is the main variable display game, and the special figure 1 variable display game, which is the secondary variable display game, are both being executed (changing). Is. The first predetermined image 675 is a symbol "○" indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (variable), and the second predetermined image 676 is also being executed (variable) in the special figure 2 variable display game. It is a symbol "○" indicating that it is (middle). The symbol "○" may be blinked and displayed to change the fourth symbol as the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol).

In the variable display area 610 in the center of the display screen of the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) of the special figure 2 variable display game (decorative special figure 2 variable display game), which is the main variable display game, is used as the main display. It is displayed in a variable manner with a large symbol (large symbol). In the variable display area 613 at the left end of the display screen, the decorative special symbol (identification information) of the special figure 1 variable display game (decorative special figure 1 variable display game), which is a dependent variable display game, is a small symbol (small) as a sub display. It is displayed variable in the design). It should be noted that the display screen may be configured not to display the fluctuation and stop result (stop symbol) of the slave fluctuation display game (here, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game), or the fluctuation display of the slave fluctuation display game may be displayed as one decoration. You may go with only a special symbol.

Although not shown, in the normal game state and the specific game states B and C, contrary to the specific game state A, the main variable display game is provided in the variable display area 610 at the center of the display screen of the display device 41. Fig. 1 The decoration special symbol of the variable display game is variablely displayed as a large symbol as the main display, and at the right end of the display screen, the special decorative symbol of the variable display game, which is the slave variable display game, is small as the sub display. It is displayed in a variable manner with a pattern.

Further, in the display unit 630 of the display screen, the special figure 2 hold corresponding to the special figure 2 hold (special figure 2 start memory, second start memory) which is the execution right of the special figure 2 variable display game (main variable display game). Three displays 630a (special figure 2 start memory display) are displayed. In the hold digestion area 640, the special figure 2 hold display 630b, which is a start memory display (changed hold display) corresponding to the start memory related to the running variable display game, is displayed. Further, the special figure 1 hold number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 hold number "3", and the special figure 2 hold number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 hold number "1".

Subsequently, in (E2), the special figure 2 variable display game (main variable display game) becomes a big hit, and the big hit stop symbol "3, 3, 3" is displayed in the variable display area 610 in the center of the display screen. .. In the variation display area 613 at the left end, the special figure 1 variation display game (subordinate variation display game) is forcibly stopped by the outlier symbol "1, 2, 7".

Further, at this time, the special figure 2 hold display 630b (changed hold display) displayed in the hold digestion area 640 disappears. The first predetermined image 675 is a symbol “x” indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is not executed, and the second predetermined image 676 is also a symbol indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is not executed. It is "x".

Next, in (E3), a fanfare effect is executed, and it is notified that it is a big hit, and a character indicating the type of big hit (here, 10R probability variation B big hit or 10R normal big hit) and information on the effect during the big hit state. The image "Battle Bonus" is displayed. Further, the character image "3" corresponding to the jackpot stop symbol is displayed smaller than the jackpot stop symbol of (E2) at the edge of the display screen, suggesting the jackpot stop symbol. Then, the character image "3" is displayed until the end of the big hit state (until the start of the ending effect). In addition, a right-handed display suggesting right-handedness may be displayed during the fanfare effect.

Then, in (E4) to (E5), the round effect which is the effect during the big hit round is executed from the first round which is the big hit round to the final round 10 rounds. A character image "8 consecutive villas" indicating that the big hits have occurred eight times in a row without going through the normal game state is displayed during the round production. In addition, instead of displaying "8 consecutive villas", it may be displayed as "the number of big hits is 8 times".

Next, in (E6), the ending effect of the big hit is executed. During the ending effect, under predetermined conditions, a break timing notification effect for notifying an appropriate break timing is executed, unlike the normal ending effect. In the present embodiment, the predetermined condition is a condition relating to the continuation of the big hit, and the number of consecutive villas is a predetermined number of times (8 times), but other predetermined conditions corresponding to the fact that the game is better than usual. But it may be. For example, as another predetermined condition, the number of times of rushing into the small hit rush may be a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times).

Further, the predetermined condition for executing the break timing notification effect may be configured to be set by the person in charge of the game hall (game store) by the hall / player setting mode process (B0011, FIG. 78). This makes it possible to set predetermined conditions according to the level of a general player in the playground.

As mentioned above, during the fanfare production, the process related to the big hit (that is, the opening of the big winning opening) does not start until the right-handed hit is started and the game ball passes through the normal drawing start gate 34 (right gate) (that is, the opening of the big winning opening). A6003) in FIG. 39A, an example of the break timing is before the game ball passes through the fanfare start gate 34 at the start of the big hit. Therefore, as a break timing notification effect, along with an image 679 that imitates the game board 30, a character image 678 such as "If you do not pass the ball through the right gate at the start of the big hit, you can take a break !!" Is displayed. Image 679 shows a state in which the game ball is not allowed to enter the normal drawing start gate 34 by hitting right on the game board 30. Another example of the break timing is during the specific gaming states AC (during the time reduction / probability change state).

In addition, the break timing notification effect of (E6) is not the ending effect (predetermined effect) at the end of the big hit, but the fanfare effect at the start of the big hit (separate) so that the player can grasp the break timing more directly. It may be executed in the predetermined effect).

In this way, after the condition device is activated (here, the jackpot information is set in the jackpot flag area), the jackpot game (big winning opening) is performed by passing the gaming ball through the normal drawing start gate 34 (specific entry area). In the gaming machine 10 at which (opening) starts, a break timing notification effect for notifying the break timing can be executed. Therefore, the player can recognize an appropriate break timing, and it is possible to suppress the player from feeling tired even when the right-handed state lasts for a long time. Further, if the break timing notification effect is frequently executed, it interferes with other effects, but since the break timing notification effect can be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, since it is generally known that there is no disadvantage even if a break is made during a normal gaming state or a time saving / probability change state, there is no disadvantage peculiar to the gaming machine 10 in the break timing notification effect. It is preferable to notify the break timing. In the present embodiment, the break timing that is preferable to be notified is the timing until the game ball passes to the normal drawing start gate 34 (specific entry area) after the display of the stop symbol of the big hit. It should be noted that this break timing notification effect can also explain how to play the game, such as how to start the big hit game (opening of the big winning opening).

[Variation example of the fifth embodiment]
In the above, the configuration in which both the symbol confirmation count 1 signal and the symbol confirmation count 2 signal are output from the external information terminal 71 to the external device has been described, but the symbol confirmation count 1 signal is omitted and is not output to the external device. Is also possible. That is, it is also possible to output only the symbol confirmation count 2 signal to the external device. In this case, the processes of steps A5301a and A5310a in FIG. 91, steps A5401a and A5410a in FIG. 92, and steps A9525 and 94A in FIG. 93B are omitted.

Further, if the configuration is such that the symbol confirmation number 2 signal is generated only when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are normally stopped, the special figure variable display that has normally stopped except for the forced stop. The number of games can be totaled by an external device. For such a configuration, for example, steps A5301b, A5310b, A5310c in FIG. 91 and steps A5401b, A5411b, A5411c in FIG. 92 may be omitted.

Further, unlike FIG. 92, there is also a configuration in which one of the special figure variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped instead of being interrupted by a small hit of the special figure variable display game. It is possible. To do so, for example, steps A5409 and A5420-A5422 in FIG. 92 may be omitted.

Further, the effect control device 300 is based on the effect mode set in the effect mode switching setting process and the symbol stop command (decorative special figure 1 stop command, decorative special figure 2 stop command) received from the game control device 100. Then, the number of stops of all variable display games, the number of stops of the main variable display game, and the number of stops of the secondary variable display game in each game state (each production mode) are counted, and a display device (sub display) such as the display device 41 is counted. It may be displayed on the device). By doing so, even if the top unit overhanging the player side is provided on the upper part of the glass frame 15 or the like and the data display is difficult to see, the player can play the number of games (rotation number, fluctuation) of the main fluctuation display game. The number of times, the number of executions), the number of games of the dependent variable display game, and the like can be grasped by the display device in the gaming machine 10.

Further, instead of the game board of FIGS. 87-89, a game board as shown in FIG. 111 of JP-A-2017-148127 may be used.

[Action / effect of the fifth embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment includes a control means capable of executing a variable display game in which identification information is variablely displayed based on the establishment of a start condition, and when the stop result of the variable display game is a special result. It is possible to generate a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. The control means (game control device 100) executes the first variable display game based on the establishment of the first start condition (for example, winning a prize in the start winning opening), and the second start condition is satisfied (for example, another start). It is possible to execute the second variable display game based on the winning of the winning opening), and to set both the first variable display game and the second variable display game in the running state. Depending on the game state, one of the first variable display game and the second variable display game is configured (controlled) so as to be defined as the main variable display game (main variable display game).

According to such a gaming machine 10, the gaming property can be changed according to the gaming state, and the gaming is not monotonous. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the control means can output a first signal (for example, a symbol fixed number of times 2 signal) corresponding to the stop of the main variable display game to the outside of the gaming machine 10. At the same time, in addition to the first signal, the variable display game is stopped regardless of whether it is the main variable display game (main variable display game) or the non-main variable display game (subordinate variable display game). The second signal corresponding to (for example, one signal for the number of times the symbol is fixed) can be output to the outside of the game machine 10.

Therefore, the number of games of the main variable display game (main variable display game) mainly recognized by the player can be acquired by an external device external to the gaming machine 10. Further, in the external device, it is possible to select whether to display the number of games of all the variable display games or only the number of games of the main variable display game (main variable display game), which increases convenience. Further, in the external device, by subtracting the number of games of the main variable display game (main variable display game) from the number of games of all variable display games, the game of the non-main variable display game (subordinate variable display game) is played. You can get the number (almost the number of games with long fluctuations), which increases convenience.

Further, the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment includes a normal variable winning device 37 that can be converted into an easy state in which a game ball easily flows in and a non-easy state in which a game ball does not easily flow in. The gaming machine 10 has a first high probability state (specific gaming state A) in which the probability of a special result (big hit) is higher than that in the normal gaming state and the normal variable winning device 37 is maintained in the non-easy state, and the special result is obtained. It is possible to generate a second high probability state (specific game state B) in which the probability is higher than that of the normal game state and the normal variable winning device 37 can be easily converted into a state. After the end of one special gaming state (big hit state), the control means can generate a combination of the first high-probability state and the second high-probability state consecutive to the first high-probability state one or more times. Therefore, the profit of the player is increased, and the interest of the game is improved.

The gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment variablely displays the identification information based on the entry of the game ball into the main starting area or the entry of the game ball into a slave starting area different from the main starting area. A player is provided with a control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game, and when the stop result of the variable display game (special figure variable display game) is a special result (for example, a big hit result or a small hit result). It is possible to generate a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. The control means are a main variable display game (one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game) executed based on the entry of the game ball into the main starting area, and the game ball to the secondary starting area. It is possible to put both the follow-up variable display game (the other of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game) executed based on the entry of the ball into the changing state. When the main variation display game has a special result, the control means forcibly stops the dependent variation display game with a result other than the special result (for example, a missing result). Further, the control means can output a predetermined signal (for example, a symbol determination number 2 signal, a first signal) corresponding to the stop of the main variation display game to the outside of the gaming machine 10.

According to such a gaming machine 10, the signal output to the outside of the gaming machine 10 is appropriately adjusted, and the external device outside the gaming machine 10 corresponds to the stop of the main variation display game, but the secondary variation display game. The number of games (rotation speed, number of fluctuations, number of executions) of the main variation display game can be acquired based on the generation of a predetermined signal that does not correspond to the stop. Therefore, the number of games that is substantially the same as the number of games recognized by the player can be acquired and displayed, so that the player or the like does not feel uncomfortable and the interest of the game is improved.

Further, except for the follow-up variation display game in which the signal output to the outside of the gaming machine 10 is appropriately adjusted and the external device outside the gaming machine 10 is forcibly stopped with a result other than the special result (missing result). In this way, the number of variable display games in which the stop result is drawn can be obtained almost accurately. Therefore, in an external device such as a game hall internal management device (hall computer), the measured value of the probability of occurrence of the special result (for example, the probability of occurrence of a big hit) can be accurately obtained from the number of games and the number of special results.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the control means (game control device 100) is a variable display game regardless of whether it is a main variable display game or a secondary variable display game, in addition to a predetermined signal. It is possible to output a signal (for example, a symbol fixed number 1 signal, a second signal) corresponding to the stop of (special figure variation display game) to the outside of the gaming machine 10.

Therefore, on an external device such as a data display, it is possible to select whether to display the number of games of all variable display games or only the number of games of the main variable display game, which increases convenience. Further, in an external device such as an internal management device (hall computer) of the amusement park, the number of games of the secondary variable display game (almost long) is obtained by subtracting the number of games of the main variable display game from the number of games of all variable display games. The number of fluctuating games) can be obtained, increasing convenience.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the variable display game is the first variable display game (special figure) in which the variable display game becomes the main variable display game in the first gaming state (for example, normal gaming state, specific gaming states B, C). 1 variable display game) and a second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) that becomes a main variable display game in a second gaming state (for example, a small hit rush state) different from the first gaming state. In the first game state, it is possible to output a predetermined signal corresponding to the stop of the first variable display game, and in the second game state, it is possible to output a predetermined signal corresponding to the stop of the second variable display game.

Therefore, it is possible to output a predetermined signal corresponding to the stop of the main variation display game according to each game state. Therefore, in an external device such as a game hall internal management device (hall computer), it is possible to accurately obtain an actually measured value of the probability of occurrence of a special result (for example, the probability of occurrence of a big hit) according to each game state.

The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes can be made within the scope of the technical idea, and it is clear that these are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Is. For example, it is possible to combine a plurality of embodiments. Further, for example, the present invention can be applied to other types of gaming machines (slot machines, etc.). The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of claims and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and content equivalent to the scope of claims.

For example, when the above embodiment is applied to a slot machine, the game medium used for the game is a medal (coin) instead of the game ball, and the number of prize balls is replaced with the number of medals to be paid out. In the slot machine, the payout rate (base) as performance information is the ratio (%) of the number of medals to be paid out to the number of medals inserted into the slot machine, and the bonus ratio is the number of medals paid out in a predetermined period. Of these, the ratio (%) of the number of medals paid out by various bonuses.

10 Pachinko machine 12 Front frame (game frame)
25 Direction button 30 Game board 32 Game area 36 1st start winning opening (1st start winning area)
37 Ordinary variable winning device 38 1st special variable winning device 39 2nd special variable winning device 40 Center case 41 Display device 44 Board effect device 46 Board decoration device 50 Collective display device (LED)
93 Setting key switch 100 Game control device (main board)
112 RAM initialization switch 152 Performance display device 200 Payout control device 300 Production control device (sub-board)
400 power supply

Claims (1)

A control means capable of executing a variable display game that variablely displays identification information based on the establishment of a start condition is provided, and when the stop result of the variable display game is a special result, a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. In possible gaming machines
The control means is
Execute the first variable display game based on the establishment of the first start condition,
Execute the second variable display game based on the establishment of the second start condition,
It is possible to put both the first variable display game and the second variable display game in the running state.
Depending on the game state, one of the first variable display game and the second variable display game is configured to be defined as the main variable display game.
The first signal corresponding to the stop of the main variable display game can be output to the outside of the gaming machine, and the first signal can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.
In addition to the first signal, a second signal corresponding to the stoppage of the fluctuation display game is transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine regardless of whether it is the main fluctuation display game or the non-main fluctuation display game. A gaming machine characterized by being capable of output.

Images